Anda di halaman 1dari 257

BSC6900 UMTS

V900R011C00

Hardware Description

Issue 08
Date 2011-01-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description About This Document

About This Document

Overview
This document describes the hardware components of the BSC6900. It provides the users with
a detailed and comprehensive reference to the BSC6900.

Product Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

BSC6900 V900R011C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Installers
l Site operators

Organization
1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description
This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description.
2 Physical Structure
The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, GPS antenna system, and LMT.
3 Cabinet
The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei
N68E-22 cabinet or the Huawei N68E-21-N cabinet.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
About This Document Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box, air defence subrack, rear cable
trough, subrack, independent fan subrack, rack.

5 Subracks

This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an
independent unit.

6 Boards

This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.

7 Cables

This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.

8 LEDs on the Boards

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

9 DIP Switches on Components

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which


if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not


avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save


time.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement


important points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description About This Document

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.


Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
About This Document Hardware Description

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and


quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Contents

Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii


1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description....................................................1-1
2 Physical Structure.......................................................................................................................2-1
3 Cabinet.........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet..............................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Classification of Cabinets................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3 Components of the Cabinet.............................................................................................................................3-5
3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet..........................................................................................................3-6
3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet...................................................................................................................3-8
3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components.................................................................3-8
3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet........................................................3-10
3.5.3 Distribution of Signal Cables for the MPR..........................................................................................3-14
3.5.4 Distribution of Signal Cables for the EPR...........................................................................................3-20

4 Components of the Cabinet.....................................................................................................4-1


4.1 Power Distribution Box...................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Front Panel of the Power Distribution Box............................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Rear Panel of the Power Distribution Box.............................................................................................4-3
4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the Power Distribution Box.......................................................................4-4
4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box...........................................................4-5
4.2 Air Defence Subrack.......................................................................................................................................4-6
4.3 Rear Cable Trough..........................................................................................................................................4-7
4.4 Independent Fan Subrack................................................................................................................................4-7
4.4.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack.........................................................................................4-8
4.4.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack....................................................................4-9

5 Subracks.......................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Classification of Subracks...............................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Components of the Subrack............................................................................................................................5-2
5.3 Fan Box...........................................................................................................................................................5-4
5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board).........................................................................................5-4
5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board).........................................................................................5-7
5.4 Slots in the Subrack.........................................................................................................................................5-9

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Contents Hardware Description

5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack...........................................................................................................................5-10


5.6 Configuration of the Subrack........................................................................................................................5-11
5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS....................................................................................................................5-12
5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS.....................................................................................................................5-12
5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack.......................................................................................................5-13

6 Boards...........................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 AEUa Board....................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.1.1 Functions of the AEUa Board................................................................................................................6-6
6.1.2 Panel of the AEUa Board.......................................................................................................................6-6
6.1.3 LEDs on the AEUa Board......................................................................................................................6-7
6.1.4 Ports on the AEUa Board.......................................................................................................................6-8
6.1.5 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board.........................................................................................................6-8
6.1.6 Technical Specifications of the AEUa Board.......................................................................................6-11
6.2 AOUa Board..................................................................................................................................................6-12
6.2.1 Functions of the AOUa Board..............................................................................................................6-13
6.2.2 Panel of the AOUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-13
6.2.3 LEDs on the AOUa Board...................................................................................................................6-14
6.2.4 Ports on the AOUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-15
6.2.5 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board.......................................................................................................6-15
6.2.6 Technical Specifications of the AOUa Board......................................................................................6-17
6.3 AOUc Board..................................................................................................................................................6-19
6.3.1 Functions of the AOUc Board..............................................................................................................6-20
6.3.2 Panel of the AOUc Board.....................................................................................................................6-20
6.3.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board...................................................................................................................6-21
6.3.4 Ports on the AOUc Board.....................................................................................................................6-22
6.3.5 Technical Specifications of the AOUc Board......................................................................................6-22
6.4 DPUb Board..................................................................................................................................................6-25
6.4.1 Functions of the DPUb Board..............................................................................................................6-25
6.4.2 Panel of the DPUb Board.....................................................................................................................6-26
6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUb Board....................................................................................................................6-27
6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUb Board.......................................................................................6-27
6.5 DPUe Board..................................................................................................................................................6-28
6.5.1 Functions of the DPUe Board..............................................................................................................6-28
6.5.2 Panel of the DPUe Board.....................................................................................................................6-29
6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUe Board....................................................................................................................6-29
6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUe Board.......................................................................................6-30
6.6 FG2a Board...................................................................................................................................................6-31
6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a Board...............................................................................................................6-31
6.6.2 Panel of the FG2a Board......................................................................................................................6-31
6.6.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board.....................................................................................................................6-32
6.6.4 Ports on the FG2a Board......................................................................................................................6-33
6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board........................................................................................6-34

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Contents

6.7 FG2c Board...................................................................................................................................................6-35


6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board...............................................................................................................6-36
6.7.2 Panel of the FG2c Board......................................................................................................................6-36
6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board.....................................................................................................................6-37
6.7.4 Ports on the FG2c Board......................................................................................................................6-38
6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board........................................................................................6-38
6.8 GCUa/GCGa Board.......................................................................................................................................6-40
6.8.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board...................................................................................................6-40
6.8.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board.........................................................................................................6-41
6.8.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board........................................................................................................6-41
6.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board.........................................................................................................6-42
6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board...........................................................................6-43
6.9 GOUa Board..................................................................................................................................................6-43
6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa Board..............................................................................................................6-44
6.9.2 Panel of the GOUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-44
6.9.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board...................................................................................................................6-45
6.9.4 Ports on the GOUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-45
6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board......................................................................................6-45
6.10 GOUc Board................................................................................................................................................6-48
6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc Board............................................................................................................6-48
6.10.2 Panel of the GOUc Board...................................................................................................................6-48
6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board.................................................................................................................6-49
6.10.4 Ports on the GOUc Board...................................................................................................................6-50
6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board....................................................................................6-50
6.11 OMUa Board...............................................................................................................................................6-52
6.11.1 Functions of the OMUa Board...........................................................................................................6-53
6.11.2 Panel of the OMUa Board..................................................................................................................6-53
6.11.3 LEDs on the OMUa Board.................................................................................................................6-55
6.11.4 Ports on the OMUa Board..................................................................................................................6-56
6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa Board...................................................................................6-56
6.12 PAMU Board...............................................................................................................................................6-57
6.12.1 Functions of the PAMU Board...........................................................................................................6-58
6.12.2 Panel of the PAMU Board.................................................................................................................6-58
6.12.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board................................................................................................................6-59
6.12.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board.......................................................................................................6-59
6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board...................................................................................6-60
6.13 PEUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-60
6.13.1 Functions of the PEUa Board.............................................................................................................6-61
6.13.2 Panel of the PEUa Board....................................................................................................................6-61
6.13.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board...................................................................................................................6-62
6.13.4 Ports on the PEUa Board....................................................................................................................6-63
6.13.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board......................................................................................................6-63

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Contents Hardware Description

6.13.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board.....................................................................................6-66


6.14 PFCU Board................................................................................................................................................6-67
6.14.1 Functions of the PFCU Board............................................................................................................6-68
6.14.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board.........................................................................................................6-68
6.14.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board....................................................................................6-70
6.15 PFCB Board................................................................................................................................................6-70
6.15.1 Functions of the PFCB Board............................................................................................................6-70
6.15.2 Pins on the PFCB Board.....................................................................................................................6-71
6.15.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board....................................................................................6-72
6.16 POUa Board................................................................................................................................................6-72
6.16.1 Functions of the POUa Board............................................................................................................6-73
6.16.2 Panel of the POUa Board...................................................................................................................6-73
6.16.3 LEDs on the POUa Board..................................................................................................................6-74
6.16.4 Ports on the POUa Board...................................................................................................................6-75
6.16.5 DIP Switches on the POUa Board......................................................................................................6-75
6.16.6 Technical Specifications of the POUa Board.....................................................................................6-78
6.17 POUc Board................................................................................................................................................6-79
6.17.1 Functions of the POUc Board............................................................................................................6-80
6.17.2 Panel of the POUc Board...................................................................................................................6-80
6.17.3 LEDs on the POUc Board..................................................................................................................6-81
6.17.4 Ports on the POUc Board...................................................................................................................6-82
6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board.....................................................................................6-82
6.18 SCUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-84
6.18.1 Functions of the SCUa Board.............................................................................................................6-85
6.18.2 Panel of the SCUa Board...................................................................................................................6-85
6.18.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board..................................................................................................................6-86
6.18.4 Ports on the SCUa Board...................................................................................................................6-87
6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board.....................................................................................6-88
6.19 SPUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-88
6.19.1 Functions of the SPUa Board.............................................................................................................6-89
6.19.2 Panel of the SPUa Board....................................................................................................................6-90
6.19.3 LEDs on the SPUa Board...................................................................................................................6-91
6.19.4 Ports on the SPUa Board....................................................................................................................6-92
6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUa Board.....................................................................................6-92
6.20 SPUb Board.................................................................................................................................................6-93
6.20.1 Functions of the SPUb Board.............................................................................................................6-94
6.20.2 Panel of the SPUb Board....................................................................................................................6-95
6.20.3 LEDs on the SPUb Board...................................................................................................................6-96
6.20.4 Ports on the SPUb Board....................................................................................................................6-96
6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUb Board.....................................................................................6-97
6.21 UOIa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-97
6.21.1 Functions of the UOIa Board.............................................................................................................6-98

x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Contents

6.21.2 Panel of the UOIa Board....................................................................................................................6-98


6.21.3 LEDs on the UOIa Board...................................................................................................................6-99
6.21.4 Ports on the UOIa Board..................................................................................................................6-100
6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIa Board....................................................................................6-100
6.22 UOIc Board...............................................................................................................................................6-103
6.22.1 Functions of the UOIc Board...........................................................................................................6-104
6.22.2 Panel of the UOIc Board..................................................................................................................6-104
6.22.3 LEDs on the UOIc Board.................................................................................................................6-105
6.22.4 Ports on the UOIc Board..................................................................................................................6-106
6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIc Board....................................................................................6-106

7 Cables...........................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Power Cables...................................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2 PGND Cables..................................................................................................................................................7-6
7.3 Optical Cable...................................................................................................................................................7-8
7.4 75-ohm Coaxial Cable.....................................................................................................................................7-9
7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable.........................................................................................................7-11
7.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable.........................................................................................................................7-15
7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable...............................................................................................7-17
7.8 BITS Clock Cable.........................................................................................................................................7-20
7.9 Y-Shaped Clock Cable..................................................................................................................................7-22
7.10 Line Clock Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................7-23
7.11 Straight-Through Cable...............................................................................................................................7-24
7.12 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack........................................................................7-26
7.13 Alarm Box Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................7-28
7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box..........................................................................7-29
7.15 OMU serial port cable.................................................................................................................................7-31
7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable.................................................................................................................7-31
7.17 EMU RS485 Communication Cable...........................................................................................................7-32

8 LEDs on the Boards....................................................................................................................8-1


8.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board...............................................................................................................................8-3
8.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board.............................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board.............................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.4 LEDs on the DPUb Board...............................................................................................................................8-4
8.5 LEDs on the DPUe Board...............................................................................................................................8-5
8.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board................................................................................................................................8-6
8.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board................................................................................................................................8-6
8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board.............................................................................................................................. 8-8
8.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board............................................................................................................................ 8-8
8.11 LEDs on the OMUa Board............................................................................................................................8-9
8.12 LEDs on the PAMU Board.........................................................................................................................8-10
8.13 LEDs on the PEUa Board............................................................................................................................8-11

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Contents Hardware Description

8.14 LEDs on the POUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-11


8.15 LEDs on the POUc Board...........................................................................................................................8-12
8.16 LEDs on the SCUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-12
8.17 LEDs on the SPUa Board............................................................................................................................8-13
8.18 LEDs on the SPUb Board............................................................................................................................8-14
8.19 LEDs on the UOIa Board............................................................................................................................8-15
8.20 LEDs on the UOIc Board............................................................................................................................8-15

9 DIP Switches on Components.................................................................................................9-1


9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack.............................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board..................................................................................................................9-3
9.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board..................................................................................................................9-6
9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board....................................................................................................................9-8
9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board...................................................................................................................9-9
9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board....................................................................................................................9-12
9.7 Pins on the PFCB Board................................................................................................................................9-14
9.8 DIP Switches on the POUa Board.................................................................................................................9-15

xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Figures

Figures

Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure...............................................................................................................2-1


Figure 3-1 Single-door N68E-22 cabinet.............................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-2 Double-door N68E-22 cabinet............................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 N68E-21-N cabinet.............................................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 Components of the cabinet (N68E-22 model)....................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-5 Working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR........................................................3-9
Figure 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the N68E-22 cabinet .......................................3-11
Figure 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the N68E-21-N cabinet ...................................3-13
Figure 3-8 Connections of signal cables for the MPR ......................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-9 Connections of signal cables for the EPR .......................................................................................3-21
Figure 4-1 Front panel of the power distribution box..........................................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the power distribution box (WP1E01DPD).................................................................4-4
Figure 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR..................................................4-6
Figure 4-4 Air defence subrack............................................................................................................................4-7
Figure 4-5 Rear cable trough................................................................................................................................4-7
Figure 4-6 Front view of the independent fan subrack.........................................................................................4-8
Figure 4-7 Rear view of the independent fan subrack..........................................................................................4-9
Figure 5-1 Structure of the subrack......................................................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board).......................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-3 Fan box (configured with the PFCB board).......................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-4 Structure of the subrack......................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-5 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-6 MPS in full configuration.................................................................................................................5-12
Figure 5-7 EPS in full configuration..................................................................................................................5-13
Figure 6-1 Panel of the AEUa board....................................................................................................................6-7
Figure 6-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board.................................................................................6-9
Figure 6-3 Panel of the AOUa board..................................................................................................................6-14
Figure 6-4 Layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board..............................................................................6-16
Figure 6-5 Panel of the AOUc board..................................................................................................................6-21
Figure 6-6 Panel of the DPUb board..................................................................................................................6-26
Figure 6-7 Panel of the DPUe board..................................................................................................................6-29
Figure 6-8 Panel of the FG2a board...................................................................................................................6-32
Figure 6-9 Panel of the FG2c board...................................................................................................................6-37

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Figures Hardware Description

Figure 6-10 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa board....................................................................................................6-41


Figure 6-11 Panel of the GOUa board................................................................................................................6-44
Figure 6-12 Panel of the GOUc board................................................................................................................6-49
Figure 6-13 Panel of the OMUa board...............................................................................................................6-54
Figure 6-14 Panel of the PAMU board.............................................................................................................. 6-58
Figure 6-15 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board..............................................................................6-59
Figure 6-16 Panel of the PEUa board.................................................................................................................6-62
Figure 6-17 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.............................................................................6-64
Figure 6-18 DIP switch on the PFCU board...................................................................................................... 6-68
Figure 6-19 DIP switch on the PFCU board...................................................................................................... 6-69
Figure 6-20 Pins on the PFCB board..................................................................................................................6-71
Figure 6-21 Pins on the PFCB board..................................................................................................................6-71
Figure 6-22 Panel of the POUa board................................................................................................................6-74
Figure 6-23 Layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board.............................................................................6-76
Figure 6-24 Panel of the POUc board................................................................................................................6-81
Figure 6-25 Panel of the SCUa board................................................................................................................ 6-86
Figure 6-26 Panel of the SPUa board.................................................................................................................6-91
Figure 6-27 Panel of the SPUb board.................................................................................................................6-95
Figure 6-28 Panel of the UOIa board.................................................................................................................6-99
Figure 6-29 Panel of the UOIc board...............................................................................................................6-105
Figure 7-1 Internal power cable for subracks.......................................................................................................7-5
Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack........................................................................7-5
Figure 7-3 External power cable for the N68E-22 cabinet...................................................................................7-5
Figure 7-4 External power cable for the N68E-21-N cabinet..............................................................................7-6
Figure 7-5 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack....................................................................................7-7
Figure 7-6 Other PGND cables............................................................................................................................7-7
Figure 7-7 Installation positions of the optical cable...........................................................................................7-9
Figure 7-8 75-ohm coaxial cable........................................................................................................................7-10
Figure 7-9 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable..............................................................................................7-12
Figure 7-10 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables ...............................................7-14
Figure 7-11 120-ohm twisted pair cable.............................................................................................................7-15
Figure 7-12 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable...................................................................................7-17
Figure 7-13 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables...................................... 7-20
Figure 7-14 75-ohm coaxial clock cable............................................................................................................7-20
Figure 7-15 120-ohm clock conversion cable....................................................................................................7-21
Figure 7-16 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables....................................................................7-21
Figure 7-17 Y-shaped clock cable......................................................................................................................7-22
Figure 7-18 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables........................................................................7-23
Figure 7-19 Line clock signal cable...................................................................................................................7-23
Figure 7-20 Shielded straight-through cable......................................................................................................7-24
Figure 7-21 Unshielded straight-through cable..................................................................................................7-25
Figure 7-22 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between the SCUa boards in different
subracks...............................................................................................................................................................7-26

xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Figures

Figure 7-23 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack..............................................................7-26
Figure 7-24 Alarm box signal cable...................................................................................................................7-28
Figure 7-25 Connection of the alarm box signal cable.......................................................................................7-29
Figure 7-26 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.................................................................7-29
Figure 7-27 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box......................7-30
Figure 7-28 OMU serial port cable....................................................................................................................7-31
Figure 7-29 GPS signal transmission cable........................................................................................................7-32
Figure 7-30 RS485 communication cable..........................................................................................................7-32
Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack...................................................................................9-2
Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board.................................................................................9-4
Figure 9-3 Layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board................................................................................9-7
Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board..................................................................................9-8
Figure 9-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board...............................................................................9-10
Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board........................................................................................................9-13
Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board........................................................................................................9-13
Figure 9-8 Pins on the PFCB board....................................................................................................................9-14
Figure 9-9 Pins on the PFCB board....................................................................................................................9-15
Figure 9-10 Layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board.............................................................................9-16

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Tables

Tables

Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900...............................................................................................................2-2


Table 3-1 Configuration of the cabinet.................................................................................................................3-6
Table 3-2 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22).............................................................3-6
Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-21-N).........................................................3-7
Table 3-4 Working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR.........................................................3-9
Table 3-5 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.........................................3-12
Table 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.........................................3-14
Table 3-7 Connections of signal cables for the MPR.........................................................................................3-16
Table 3-8 Connections of signal cables for the EPR..........................................................................................3-22
Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the power distribution box.......................................................................4-3
Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the power distribution box (WP1E01DPD).............................................4-4
Table 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR....................................................4-6
Table 4-4 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.....................................................................4-9
Table 5-1 Components of the subrack..................................................................................................................5-4
Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)......................................................................5-5
Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)........................................5-6
Table 5-4 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)......................................................................5-8
Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)........................................5-9
Table 5-6 Description about the bits...................................................................................................................5-11
Table 5-7 Setting of the DIP switch...................................................................................................................5-11
Table 5-8 Technical specifications of the subrack.............................................................................................5-13
Table 6-1 Classification of the BSC6900 boards.................................................................................................6-1
Table 6-2 LEDs on the AEUa board....................................................................................................................6-7
Table 6-3 Ports on the AEUa board......................................................................................................................6-8
Table 6-4 Description of the DIP switches on the AEUa board.........................................................................6-10
Table 6-5 Hardware specifications of the AEUa board......................................................................................6-11
Table 6-6 Specifications of the board processing capability..............................................................................6-12
Table 6-7 LEDs on the AOUa board..................................................................................................................6-14
Table 6-8 Ports on the AOUa board...................................................................................................................6-15
Table 6-9 Description of the DIP switches on the AOUa board........................................................................6-16
Table 6-10 Hardware specifications of the AOUa board...................................................................................6-17
Table 6-11 Specifications for the board processing capability...........................................................................6-18
Table 6-12 Specifications of the optical ports on the AOUa board....................................................................6-18

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Tables Hardware Description

Table 6-13 LEDs on the AOUc board................................................................................................................6-21


Table 6-14 Ports on the AOUc board.................................................................................................................6-22
Table 6-15 Hardware specifications of the AOUc board...................................................................................6-23
Table 6-16 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-23
Table 6-17 Specifications of the optical ports on the AOUc board....................................................................6-24
Table 6-18 LEDs on the DPUb board................................................................................................................6-27
Table 6-19 Technical specifications of the DPUb board....................................................................................6-27
Table 6-20 LEDs on the DPUe board.................................................................................................................6-30
Table 6-21 Technical specifications of the DPUe board....................................................................................6-30
Table 6-22 LEDs on the FG2a board..................................................................................................................6-33
Table 6-23 Ports on the FG2a board...................................................................................................................6-33
Table 6-24 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board.....................................................................................6-34
Table 6-25 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-34
Table 6-26 LEDs on the FG2c board..................................................................................................................6-37
Table 6-27 Ports on the FG2c board...................................................................................................................6-38
Table 6-28 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board.....................................................................................6-39
Table 6-29 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-39
Table 6-30 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.....................................................................................................6-42
Table 6-31 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa board......................................................................................................6-42
Table 6-32 Technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board........................................................................6-43
Table 6-33 LEDs on the GOUa board................................................................................................................6-45
Table 6-34 Ports on the GOUa board.................................................................................................................6-45
Table 6-35 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board...................................................................................6-46
Table 6-36 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-46
Table 6-37 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board....................................................................6-47
Table 6-38 LEDs on the GOUc board................................................................................................................6-49
Table 6-39 Ports on the GOUc board.................................................................................................................6-50
Table 6-40 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board...................................................................................6-51
Table 6-41 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-51
Table 6-42 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board....................................................................6-52
Table 6-43 LEDs on the OMUa board...............................................................................................................6-55
Table 6-44 Ports on the OMUa board................................................................................................................6-56
Table 6-45 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa board......................................................................6-56
Table 6-46 Performance counters of the OMUa board......................................................................................6-57
Table 6-47 LEDs on the PAMU board...............................................................................................................6-59
Table 6-48 DIP switch on the PAMU board......................................................................................................6-60
Table 6-49 Technical specifications of the PAMU board..................................................................................6-60
Table 6-50 LEDs on the PEUa board.................................................................................................................6-62
Table 6-51 Ports on the PEUa board..................................................................................................................6-63
Table 6-52 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board........................................................................6-65
Table 6-53 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board....................................................................................6-66
Table 6-54 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-67

xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Tables

Table 6-55 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack).............................................6-69
Table 6-56 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)...................................................6-69
Table 6-57 Technical specifications of the PFCU board....................................................................................6-70
Table 6-58 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)........................................................ 6-71
Table 6-59 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack).............................................................. 6-72
Table 6-60 Technical specifications of the PFCB board....................................................................................6-72
Table 6-61 LEDs on the POUa board.................................................................................................................6-74
Table 6-62 Ports on the POUa board..................................................................................................................6-75
Table 6-63 Description of the DIP switches on the POUa board.......................................................................6-77
Table 6-64 Hardware specifications of the POUa board....................................................................................6-78
Table 6-65 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-78
Table 6-66 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUa board....................................................................6-79
Table 6-67 LEDs on the POUc board.................................................................................................................6-81
Table 6-68 Ports on the POUc board..................................................................................................................6-82
Table 6-69 Hardware specifications of the POUc board....................................................................................6-82
Table 6-70 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-83
Table 6-71 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board....................................................................6-84
Table 6-72 LEDs on the SCUa board.................................................................................................................6-86
Table 6-73 Ports on the SCUa board..................................................................................................................6-87
Table 6-74 Technical specifications of the SCUa board....................................................................................6-88
Table 6-75 LEDs on the SPUa board................................................................................................................. 6-91
Table 6-76 Ports on the SPUa board.................................................................................................................. 6-92
Table 6-77 Technical specifications of the SPUa board.....................................................................................6-93
Table 6-78 LEDs on the SPUb board.................................................................................................................6-96
Table 6-79 Ports on the SPUb board..................................................................................................................6-96
Table 6-80 Technical specifications of the SPUb board.................................................................................... 6-97
Table 6-81 LEDs on the UOIa board..................................................................................................................6-99
Table 6-82 Ports on the UOIa board.................................................................................................................6-100
Table 6-83 Hardware specifications of the UOIa board...................................................................................6-100
Table 6-84 Specifications of the processing capability of the UOIa board in ATM transmission mode.........6-101
Table 6-85 Specifications of the processing capability of the UOIa board in IP transmission mode..............6-102
Table 6-86 Specifications of the optical ports on the UOIa board...................................................................6-103
Table 6-87 LEDs on the UOIc board................................................................................................................6-105
Table 6-88 Ports on the UOIc board.................................................................................................................6-106
Table 6-89 Hardware specifications of the UOIc board...................................................................................6-107
Table 6-90 Specifications of the board processing capability..........................................................................6-107
Table 6-91 Specifications of the optical ports on the UOIc board...................................................................6-108
Table 7-1 External power cables for the N68E-21-N cabinet..............................................................................7-3
Table 7-2 External power cables for the N68E-22 cabinet...................................................................................7-3
Table 7-3 Internal power cables (1)......................................................................................................................7-4
Table 7-4 Internal power cables (2)......................................................................................................................7-4
Table 7-5 PGND cables........................................................................................................................................7-6

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Tables Hardware Description

Table 7-6 BSC6900 optical cables.......................................................................................................................7-8


Table 7-7 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables...............................................7-10
Table 7-8 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable...........................................................................7-11
Table 7-9 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4..................................................................7-12
Table 7-10 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable.........................................................................7-13
Table 7-11 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2...........................................................................7-13
Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable....................................7-16
Table 7-13 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable............................................................................7-16
Table 7-14 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4................................................................7-18
Table 7-15 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable............................................................................7-18
Table 7-16 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2...........................................................................7-19
Table 7-17 Pins of the straight-through cable....................................................................................................7-25
Table 7-18 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack..............................................7-27
Table 7-19 Signals..............................................................................................................................................7-27
Table 7-20 Pins of the alarm box signal cable....................................................................................................7-28
Table 7-21 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.................................................7-29
Table 7-22 Signals..............................................................................................................................................7-30
Table 7-23 Pins of the OMU serial port cable....................................................................................................7-31
Table 7-24 Pins of the RS485 communication cable.........................................................................................7-33
Table 8-1 LEDs on the AEUa board....................................................................................................................8-3
Table 8-2 LEDs on the AOUa board....................................................................................................................8-3
Table 8-3 LEDs on the AOUc board....................................................................................................................8-4
Table 8-4 LEDs on the DPUb board....................................................................................................................8-5
Table 8-5 LEDs on the DPUe board.....................................................................................................................8-5
Table 8-6 LEDs on the FG2a board......................................................................................................................8-6
Table 8-7 LEDs on the FG2c board......................................................................................................................8-7
Table 8-8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.........................................................................................................8-7
Table 8-9 LEDs on the GOUa board....................................................................................................................8-8
Table 8-10 LEDs on the GOUc board..................................................................................................................8-9
Table 8-11 LEDs on the OMUa board.................................................................................................................8-9
Table 8-12 LEDs on the PAMU board...............................................................................................................8-10
Table 8-13 LEDs on the PEUa board.................................................................................................................8-11
Table 8-14 LEDs on the POUa board.................................................................................................................8-11
Table 8-15 LEDs on the POUc board.................................................................................................................8-12
Table 8-16 LEDs on the SCUa board.................................................................................................................8-13
Table 8-17 LEDs on the SPUa board.................................................................................................................8-13
Table 8-18 LEDs on the SPUb board.................................................................................................................8-14
Table 8-19 LEDs on the UOIa board..................................................................................................................8-15
Table 8-20 LEDs on the UOIc board..................................................................................................................8-16
Table 9-1 Description about the bits.....................................................................................................................9-3
Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch.....................................................................................................................9-3
Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the AEUa board...........................................................................9-5

xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Tables

Table 9-4 Description of the DIP switches on the AOUa board..........................................................................9-7


Table 9-5 DIP switch on the PAMU board..........................................................................................................9-9
Table 9-6 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board..........................................................................9-11
Table 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)............................................... 9-13
Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack).....................................................9-14
Table 9-9 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack).......................................................... 9-14
Table 9-10 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack).............................................................. 9-15
Table 9-11 Description of the DIP switches on the POUa board.......................................................................9-17

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware


Description

This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description.

08 (2011-01-30)
This is the eighth commercial release.
Compared with issue 07 (2010-09-15) of V900R011C00, this issue does not include any new
topics.
Compared with issue 07 (2010-09-15) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following
changes:

Topic Change Description

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the Power The figure of the rear panel of the high-power power
Distribution Box distribution box is modified.

7.17 EMU RS485 The installation of EMU RS485 communication cable is


Communication Cable modified.

Compared with issue 07 (2010-09-15) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

07 (2010-09-15)
This is the seventh commercial release.
Compared with issue 06 (2010-05-31) of V900R011C00, this issue does not include any new
topics.
Compared with issue 06 (2010-05-31) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following
changes:

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description Hardware Description

Topic Change Description

6.19.5 Technical Specifications The information about the processing capability of the
of the SPUa Board main control SPUa board and the non-main control SPUa
board is modified.

Compared with issue 06 (2010-05-31) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

06 (2010-05-31)
This is the sixth commercial release.

Compared with issue 05 (2010-03-25) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new
topics:

l 7.15 OMU serial port cable

Compared with issue 05 (2010-03-25) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following
changes:

Topic Change Description

6.4 DPUb Board The description about the slots for the DPUb board is
modified.

6.5 DPUe Board The description about the slots for the DPUe board is
modified.

6.18.4 Ports on the SCUa Board The description about the ports on SCUa board is
modified.

Compared with issue 05 (2010-03-25) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

05 (2010-03-25)
This is the fifth commercial release.

Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not include any new
topics.

Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following
changes:

Topic Change Description

DIP Switch on the Subrack Figure of the setting of the DIP Switch is
optimized.

7.17 EMU RS485 Communication Cable Figure of the EMU RS485 communication
cable is optimized.

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description

Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

04 (2010-01-30)
This is the fourth commercial release.
Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue does not include any new
topics.
Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following
changes:
Topic Change Description

6 Boards The description about the logical function of


the DPUb board is modified.

Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

03 (2009-12-05)
This is the third commercial release.
Compared with issue 02 (2009-10-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new
topics:
l Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components
Compared with issue 02 (2009-10-30) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following
changes:
Topic Change Description

6.3.2 Panel of the AOUc Board,6.7.2 Panel Figures of the panel of the AOUc board, FG2c
of the FG2c Board,6.10.2 Panel of the board, GOUc board, POUc board, and UOIc
GOUc Board,6.17.2 Panel of the POUc board are modified.
Board,6.22.2 Panel of the UOIc Board

6.3.4 Ports on the AOUc Board,6.7.4 Ports The description about the 2M0 and 2M1 ports
on the FG2c Board,6.10.4 Ports on the of the AOUc board, FG2c board, GOUc
GOUc Board,6.17.4 Ports on the POUc board, POUc board, and UOIc board is
Board,6.22.4 Ports on the UOIc Board deleted.

DIP Switch on the Subrack The description about bit 8 of the DIP switch
on the subrack is modified.

6.1.5 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board, The description about DIP Switches on the
6.13.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board AEUa board and PEUa board is optimized.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description Hardware Description

Topic Change Description

6.2.2 Panel of the AOUa Board,6.6.2 Panel Figures of the panel of the AOUa board, FG2a
of the FG2a Board,6.8.2 Panel of the board, GCUa/GCGa board, GOUa board,
GCUa/GCGa Board,6.9.2 Panel of the OMUa board, POUa board, SCUa board,
GOUa Board,6.11.2 Panel of the OMUa UOIa board, SPUa board, and SPUb board
Board,6.16.2 Panel of the POUa Board, are optimized.
6.18.2 Panel of the SCUa Board,6.21.2
Panel of the UOIa Board,6.19.2 Panel of
the SPUa Board,6.20.2 Panel of the SPUb
Board

DIP Switch on the Subrack Figure of the cover plate for the DIP switch
on the subrack is optimized.

6.3.5 Technical Specifications of the AOUc The description about technical


Board,6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the specifications of the AOUc board, FG2a
FG2a Board,6.9.5 Technical Specifications board, GOUa board, FG2c board, GOUc
of the GOUa Board,6.7.5 Technical board, UOIa board, UOIc board, and POUc
Specifications of the FG2c Board,6.10.5 board is optimized.
Technical Specifications of the GOUc
Board,6.21.5 Technical Specifications of
the UOIa Board,6.22.5 Technical
Specifications of the UOIc Board,6.17.5
Technical Specifications of the POUc
Board

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet The figure about the physical appearance of
the N68-21-N cabinet is modified. In
addition, the cabinet model name N68-21-N
is changed to N68E-21-N.

Compared with issue 02 (2009-10-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

02 (2009-10-30)
This is the second commercial release.

Compared with issue 01 (2009-07-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new
topics:
l 2 Physical Structure
l 6.1.6 Technical Specifications of the AEUa Board
l 6.2.6 Technical Specifications of the AOUa Board
l 6.3.5 Technical Specifications of the AOUc Board
l 6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUb Board
l 6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUe Board
l 6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board
l 6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board
l 6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board

1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description

l 6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board


l 6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board
l 6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa Board
l 6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board
l 6.13.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board
l 6.14.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board
l 6.15.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board
l 6.16.6 Technical Specifications of the POUa Board
l 6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board
l 6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board
l 6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUa Board
l 6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUb Board
l 6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIa Board
l 6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIc Board

Compared with issue 01 (2009-07-30) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following
changes:

Topic Change Description

6.16.1 Functions of the POUa Board The description about the Automatic
Protection Switching (APS) function is
added.

6.21.1 Functions of the UOIa Board The description about the APS function is
added.

6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa Board The description about the routing-based
backup and load sharing functions is added.

6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a Board The description about the link aggregation
function at the MAC layer is added.

6.3.1 Functions of the AOUc Board The description about the support for the Iur
interface is added.

6.22.1 Functions of the UOIc Board The description about the support for the Iur
interface is added.

6.17.1 Functions of the POUc Board The description about the support for the Iur
interface is added.

6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board The description about the support for the Iur
interface is added.

6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc Board The description about the APS function and
the description about the support for the Iur
interface is added.

6.19.1 Functions of the SPUa Board The description about the functions of the
MPU and CPUS subsystems is optimized.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description Hardware Description

Topic Change Description

6.20.1 Functions of the SPUb Board The description about the functions of the
MPU and CPUS subsystems is optimized.

Compared with issue 01 (2009-07-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

01 (2009-07-30)
This is the first commercial release.

1-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 2 Physical Structure

2 Physical Structure

The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, GPS antenna system, and LMT.

Figure 2-1 shows the BSC6900 physical structure.

Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure

(1) GPS: Global Positioning System (2) PDF: Power Distribution Frame (DC)

(3) LMT: Local Maintenance Terminal

Table 2-1 describes the components of the BSC6900.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
2 Physical Structure Hardware Description

Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900


Component Description

Cabinet For details, see 3 Cabinet.

Cables For details, see 7 Cables.

GPS antenna system The GPS antenna system consists of the antenna, feeder, jumper,
and surge protector.
The GPS antenna system is used to receive GPS satellite signals. It
is optional.

LMT The LMT refers to the operation and maintenance (OM) terminal
that is installed with the Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal
software and is connected to the OM network of the BSC6900. The
LMT is used to operate and maintain the BSC6900.
For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide.

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

3 Cabinet

About This Chapter

The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei
N68E-22 cabinet or the Huawei N68E-21-N cabinet.

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet


The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door
cabinet. The N68E-21-N cabinet is a double-door cabinet.
3.2 Classification of Cabinets
Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR) and the extended
processing rack (EPR).
3.3 Components of the Cabinet
The components of the BSC6900 cabinet are the power distribution box, subrack, air defence
subrack, independent fan subrack (configured in only the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet), cable rack,
rack, and rear cable trough.
3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet
The technical specifications of the cabinet consist of cabinet dimensions, height of the available
space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC).
3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet
This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in
the cabinet.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
3 Cabinet Hardware Description

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet


The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door
cabinet. The N68E-21-N cabinet is a double-door cabinet.
Figure 3-1 shows the single-door N68E-22 cabinet. Figure 3-2 shows the double-door N68E-22
cabinet.
Figure 3-3 shows the N68E-21-N cabinet.

Figure 3-1 Single-door N68E-22 cabinet

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-2 Double-door N68E-22 cabinet

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
3 Cabinet Hardware Description

Figure 3-3 N68E-21-N cabinet

3.2 Classification of Cabinets


Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR) and the extended
processing rack (EPR).

MPR
Only one MPR is configured in the BSC6900.

EPR
The number of EPRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume, but only one EPR can be
configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to configure the EPR.
For details on the components of the MPR or the EPR, see 3.3 Components of the Cabinet.

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

3.3 Components of the Cabinet


The components of the BSC6900 cabinet are the power distribution box, subrack, air defence
subrack, independent fan subrack (configured in only the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet), cable rack,
rack, and rear cable trough.

Figure 3-4 shows the components of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22 model).

Figure 3-4 Components of the cabinet (N68E-22 model)

(1) Air inlet (2) Independent fan subrack (3) Subrack

(4) Air defence subrack (5) Filler panel (6) Power distribution box

(7) Cable rack (8) Rear cable trough

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
3 Cabinet Hardware Description

Table 3-1 lists the components of the cabinet and describes their configurations.

Table 3-1 Configuration of the cabinet

Component Configuration

Power Distribution Box Only one power distribution box is


configured.

Subrack l The MPR is configured with one


main processing subrack (MPS) and
depending on the traffic volume zero
to two extended processing subracks
(EPSs).
l The EPR is configured with one to
three EPSs, depending on the traffic
volume.

Air Defence Subrack Two air defence subracks are


configured.

Independent Fan Subrack Only one independent fan subrack is


configured in the N68E-22 cabinet and
no independent fan subrack is
configured in the N68E-21-N cabinet.

Rear Cable Trough Three rear cable troughs are configured.

NOTE

l The subracks are numbered from bottom to top, and the MPS is numbered 0.
l The components of the N68E-21-N cabinet is the same as those of the N68E-22 cabinet, except that the
N68E-21-N cabinet is not configured with the independent fan subrack.

3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet


The technical specifications of the cabinet consist of cabinet dimensions, height of the available
space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC).

Technical Specifications of the BSC6900 Cabinet (N68E-22)


The BSC6900 uses the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet or N68E-21-N cabinet. The two models of
cabinets have different technical specifications.
Table 3-2 describes the technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22).

Table 3-2 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22)

Item Specification

Dimensions 2,200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth)

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Item Specification

Height of the available space 46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight l Empty cabinet ≤ 100 kg


l Cabinet in full configuration ≤ 320 kg

Rated input voltage -48 V DC power supply

Input voltage range -40 V to -57 V

EMC l Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386


l Meets the requirements in Council directive 89/336/
EEC

CAUTION
When the voltage of power supply is lower than the lower threshold of the input voltage scope,
multiple boards may become abnormal at the same time. Therefore, check the power system if
multiple boards are abnormal at the same time.

Technical Specifications of the BSC6900 Cabinet (N68E-21-N)


Table 3-3 describes the technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-21-N).

Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-21-N)


Item Specification

Dimensions 2,130 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth)

Height of the available space 44 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight l Empty cabinet ≤ 155 kg


l Cabinet in full configuration ≤ 380 kg

Rated input voltage -48 V

Input voltage range -40 V to -57 V

EMC l Meets the requirements in GR 1089


l Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386
l Meets the requirements in Council directive 89/336/
EEC

NOTE

An empty cabinet refers to the one that is installed with front and back doors, side panels, a power
distribution box, and a set of cables.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
3 Cabinet Hardware Description

CAUTION
When the voltage of power supply is lower than the lower threshold of the input voltage scope,
multiple boards may become abnormal at the same time. Therefore, check the power system if
multiple boards are abnormal at the same time.

3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet


This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in
the cabinet.

NOTE
The BSC6900 uses the Huawei N68E-22 or N68E-21-N cabinet. Only the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet requires
the independent fan subrack. The MPR and EPR mentioned in this section are of the N68E-22 model.

3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components


This section describes the fixed relation between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of power
distribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the components
of the cabinet.
3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet
The power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrack
and independent fan subrack, thus ensuring stable power supply to the subrack and independent
fan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the grounding bar in the
equipment room, thus protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.
3.5.3 Distribution of Signal Cables for the MPR
The signal cables for the MPR refer to Ethernet cables, optical cables, trunk cables, clock signal
cables, and monitoring signal cables for the power distribution box.
3.5.4 Distribution of Signal Cables for the EPR
The signal cables for the EPR refer to Ethernet cables, optical cables, trunk cables, and
monitoring signal cables for the power distribution box.

3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components


This section describes the fixed relation between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of power
distribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the components
of the cabinet.
For details on the working mechanism of the power system, see the Power Supply Principle.
Figure 3-5 shows the working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR. Table
3-4 describes the working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR.

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-5 Working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR

Table 3-4 Working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR
PDF Output Input of Power Output Subrack Input
Distribution Box of Power
Distribut
ion Box

63 A -48 V DC A1(-) A7 NEG -48 V DC input 1 on the


output 1 (-) independent fan subrack

A8 NEG -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2


(-)

63 A -48 V DC B1(-) B7 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 2 on the


output 2 independent fan subrack

B8 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2

63 A RTN power A1(+) A7 RTN RTN power input 1 on the


output 1 (+) independent fan subrack

A8 RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack


(+) 2

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
3 Cabinet Hardware Description

PDF Output Input of Power Output Subrack Input


Distribution Box of Power
Distribut
ion Box

63 A RTN power B1(+) B7 RTN RTN power input 2 on the


output 2 (+) independent fan subrack

B8 RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack


(+) 2

100 A -48 V DC A3(-) A9 NEG -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1


output 1 (-)

A10 NEG -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0


(-)

100 A -48 V DC B3(-) B9 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1


output 2
B10 NEG -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0
(-)

100 A RTN power A3(+) A9 RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack


output 1 (+) 1

A10 RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack


(+) 0

100 A RTN power B3(+) B9 RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack


output 2 (+) 1

B10 RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack


(+) 0

3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet


The power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrack
and independent fan subrack, thus ensuring stable power supply to the subrack and independent
fan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the grounding bar in the
equipment room, thus protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.
Figure 3-6 shows the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900
(N68E-22 cabinet).

3-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the N68E-22 cabinet

Table 3-5 describes the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900
cabinet.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
3 Cabinet Hardware Description

Table 3-5 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet
SN Description

5, 6, 11, 12 Power cables for the bottom subrack

3, 4, 9, 10 Power cables for the middle subrack

1, 2, 7, 8 Power cables for the top subrack

13 PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and


the mounting bar

14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 PGND cables connecting the subracks and the mounting
bar

24, 25, 26 Inter-cabinet PGND cables

27, 28, 29, 30 Power cables for the independent fan subrack

31 PGND cable connecting the independent fan subrack and


the mounting bar

50-57 PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels

Figure 3-7 shows the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the Figure 3-7
(N68E-21-N cabinet).

3-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the N68E-21-N cabinet

Table 3-6 describes the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900
cabinet.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
3 Cabinet Hardware Description

Table 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet
SN Description

5, 6, 11, 12 Power cables for the bottom subrack

3, 4, 9, 10 Power cables for the middle subrack

1, 2, 7, 8 Power cables for the top subrack

13 PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and


the mounting bar

14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 PGND cables connecting the subracks and the mounting
bar

20, 21 PGND cables for the cabinet busbar

24, 25, 26 PGND cables connecting the busbars of different


cabinets

50-57 PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels

3.5.3 Distribution of Signal Cables for the MPR


The signal cables for the MPR refer to Ethernet cables, optical cables, trunk cables, clock signal
cables, and monitoring signal cables for the power distribution box.

Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR


Figure 3-8 shows the connections of the signal cables for the MPR.

NOTE

l The types and number of the interface boards shown in Figure 3-8 are only taken as examples. The
actual configurations depend on the site planning.
l The installation positions and number of the Ethernet cables, optical cables, and trunk cables are
taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

3-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-8 Connections of signal cables for the MPR

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
3 Cabinet Hardware Description

Description About the Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR


Table 3-7 describes the connections of signal cables for the MPR.

Table 3-7 Connections of signal cables for the MPR


SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks
Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

1 Monitoring DB15/Port DB9/ The cable is


signal cable for connecting the MONITOR 1 mandatory and is
the power power port on the installed before
distribution box distribution box independent fan delivery. Only one
to the subrack monitoring signal
independent fan cable for the power
subrack distribution box is
configured.

2, 3 GPS signal SMA/ANT port Type N The cable is optional.


transmission on the GCGa connector/ When installed, two
cable connecting board Protect port of cables are required.
GPS surge the GPS surge
protector to protector on top
GCGa board of the cabinet

4 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The l Straight-through


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BA 10/100/1000BA cable
boards of SE-T0 port on SE-T0 port on l Installed before
different the SCUa board the SCUa board delivery
subracks in slot 6 of the in slot 6 of the
MPS EPS

5 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BA 10/100/1000BA
boards of SE-T1 port on SE-T1 port on
different the SCUa board the SCUa board
subracks in slot 6 of the in slot 7 of the
MPS EPS

6 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BA 10/100/1000BA
boards of SE-T2 port on SE-T0 port on
different the SCUa board the SCUa board
subracks in slot 6 of the in slot 6 of the
MPS EPS

7 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BA 10/100/1000BA
boards of SE-T3 port on SE-T1 port on
different the SCUa board the SCUa board
subracks in slot 6 of the in slot 7 of the
MPS EPS

3-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

8 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BA 10/100/1000BA
boards of SE-T0 port on SE-T0 port on
different the SCUa board the SCUa board
subracks in slot 7 of the in slot 7 of the
MPS EPS

9 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BA 10/100/1000BA
boards of SE-T1 port on SE-T1 port on
different the SCUa board the SCUa board
subracks in slot 7 of the in slot 6 of the
MPS EPS

10 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BA 10/100/1000BA
boards of SE-T2 port on SE-T0 port on
different the SCUa board the SCUa board
subracks in slot 7 of the in slot 7 of the
MPS EPS

11 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BA 10/100/1000BA
boards of SE-T3 port on SE-T1 port on
different the SCUa board the SCUa board
subracks in slot 7 of the in slot 6 of the
MPS EPS

12, 13 BITS clock signal SMB or BNC/ SMB connector The cable is optional.
cable BITS clock (already When installed, two
source installed on the cables are required.
BITS clock
signal cable)/
CLKIN0 port on
the GCUa/
GCGa board

14, 15 Line clock signal SMB/2M0 or SMB/CLKIN0 Two to four,


cable 2M1 port on the or CLKIN1 port optional, installed
AOUa/POUa/ on the GCUa/ when the EPS is
UOIa/AEUa GCGa board responsible for
board receiving the line
clock signals

16 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN Optional. The


signal cable CLKOUT0 ports port on the number of cables to
on the GCUa/ SCUa board in be installed and their
GCGa boards in slot 6 of the EPS actual installation
slots 12 and 13

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
3 Cabinet Hardware Description

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

17 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN positions depend on


signal cable CLKOUT1 ports port on the the site planning.
on the GCUa/ SCUa board in
GCGa boards in slot 7 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

18 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT2 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUa board in
GCGa boards in slot 6 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

19 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT3 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUa board in
GCGa boards in slot 7 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

20 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT4 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUa board in
GCGa boards in slot 6 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

21 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT5 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUa board in
GCGa boards in slot 7 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

22 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT6 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUa board in
GCGa boards in slot 6 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

23 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT7 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUa board in
GCGa boards in slot 7 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

24 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT8 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUa board in
GCGa boards in slot 6 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

3-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

25 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT9 ports port on the
on GCUa/GCGa SCUa board in
boards in slots slot 7 of the EPS
12 and 13

26 Trunk cable DB44/Electrical Another device Optional. The


connecting AEUa port on the electrical port on the
board to other AEUa board AEUa board is taken
devices as an example. The
number of cables to
27 Y-shaped trunk Y-shaped DB44/ Another device be installed and their
cable connecting Electrical ports actual installation
AEUa board to on active and positions depend on
other devices standby AEUa the site planning.
boards The information here
is an example based
on overhead cabling.

28 Optical cable LC/PC/Optical Another device Optional. The


connecting port on the number of optical
GOUa/AOUa/ GOUa/AOUa/ cables to be installed
POUa/UOIa/ POUa/UOIa/ and their actual
GOUc/AOUc/ GOUc/AOUc/ installation positions
POUc/UOIc POUc/UOIc depend on the site
board to other board planning. The
devices information here is
an example based on
overhead cabling.

29-32 Ethernet cable for RJ45/Ethernet Another device l The cable is


the OMUa board port on the mandatory. Two
OMUa board to four cables are
required.
l Straight-through
cable. The
information here
is an example
based on
overhead
cabling.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
3 Cabinet Hardware Description

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

33 Ethernet cable RJ45/Ethernet Another device l Optional. The


connecting FG2a/ port on the number of
FG2c board to FG2a/FG2c Ethernet cables to
other devices board be installed and
their actual
installation
positions depend
on the site
planning.
l Straight-through
cable. The
Ethernet cable
can be connected
to any Ethernet
port on the FG2a/
FG2c board. The
connection here
is only taken as
an example.

34 Monitoring DB15/ DB9/Monitor The cable is


signal cable for MONITOR 0 port on the rear mandatory and is
the independent port on the of the bottom installed before
fan subrack independent fan subrack delivery. Only one
subrack monitoring signal
cable for the
independent fan
subrack is
configured.

3.5.4 Distribution of Signal Cables for the EPR


The signal cables for the EPR refer to Ethernet cables, optical cables, trunk cables, and
monitoring signal cables for the power distribution box.

Connections of signal cables for the EPR


Figure 3-9 shows the connections of the signal cables for the EPR.

NOTE

l The types and number of the interface boards shown in Figure 3-9 are only taken as examples. The
actual configurations depend on the site planning.
l The installation positions and number of the Ethernet cables, optical cables, and trunk cables are
taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

3-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-9 Connections of signal cables for the EPR

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
3 Cabinet Hardware Description

Description About the Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR


Table 3-8 describes the connections of signal cables for the EPR.

Table 3-8 Connections of signal cables for the EPR


SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks
Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

1 Monitoring signal DB15/Port DB9/MONITOR The cable is


cable for the power connecting the 1 port on the mandatory and
distribution box power distribution independent fan is installed
box to the subrack before delivery.
independent fan Only one
subrack monitoring
signal cable for
the power
distribution box
is configured.

2 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The l Straight-


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BAS 10/100/1000BAS through
boards of different E-T0 port on the E-T0 port on the cable
subracks SCUa board in slot SCUa board in slot l Installed
6 of the EPS 6 of the MPS before
delivery
3 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The
connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BAS 10/100/1000BAS
boards of different E-T1 port on the E-T1 port on the
subracks SCUa board in slot SCUa board in slot
7 of the EPS 7 of the MPS

4 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BAS 10/100/1000BAS
boards of different E-T1 port on the E-T0 port on the
subracks SCUa board in slot SCUa board in slot
6 of the EPS 7 of the MPS

5 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BAS 10/100/1000BAS
boards of different E-T0 port on the E-T1 port on the
subracks SCUa board in slot SCUa board in slot
7 of the EPS 6 of the MPS

6 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BAS 10/100/1000BAS
boards of different E-T0 port on the E-T8 port on the
subracks SCUa board in slot SCUa board in slot
6 of the EPS 6 of the MPS

3-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

7 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BAS 10/100/1000BAS
boards of different E-T1 port on the E-T9 port on the
subracks SCUa board in slot SCUa board in slot
7 of the EPS 7 of the MPS

8 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BAS 10/100/1000BAS
boards of different E-T0 port on the E-T6 port on the
subracks SCUa board in slot SCUa board in slot
6 of the EPS 6 of the MPS

9 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BAS 10/100/1000BAS
boards of different E-T1 port on the E-T7 port on the
subracks SCUa board in slot SCUa board in slot
7 of the EPS 7 of the MPS

10 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BAS 10/100/1000BAS
boards of different E-T0 port on the E-T9 port on the
subracks SCUa board in slot SCUa board in slot
7 of the EPS 6 of the MPS

11 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BAS 10/100/1000BAS
boards of different E-T1 port on the E-T8 port on the
subracks SCUa board in slot SCUa board in slot
6 of the EPS 7 of the MPS

12 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BAS 10/100/1000BAS
boards of different E-T0 port on the E-T7 port on the
subracks SCUa board in slot SCUa board in slot
7 of the EPS 6 of the MPS

13 Ethernet cable RJ45/The RJ45/The


connecting SCUa 10/100/1000BAS 10/100/1000BAS
boards of different E-T1 port on the E-T6 port on the
subracks SCUa board in slot SCUa board in slot
6 of the EPS 7 of the MPS

14 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT4 RJ45/CLKIN port Optional. The


signal cable ports on the on the SCUa board number of
GCUa/GCGa in slot 6 of the EPS cables to be
boards in slots 12 installed and
and 13 their actual
installation
positions

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
3 Cabinet Hardware Description

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

15 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT5 RJ45/CLKIN port depend on the


signal cable ports on the on the SCUa board site planning.
GCUa/GCGa in slot 7 of the EPS
boards in slots 12
and 13

16 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT6 RJ45/CLKIN port


signal cable ports on the on the SCUa board
GCUa/GCGa in slot 6 of the EPS
boards in slots 12
and 13

17 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT7 RJ45/CLKIN port


signal cable ports on the on the SCUa board
GCUa/GCGa in slot 7 of the EPS
boards in slots 12
and 13

18 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT8 RJ45/CLKIN port


signal cable ports on the on the SCUa board
GCUa/GCGa in slot 6 of the EPS
boards in slots 12
and 13

19 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT9 RJ45/CLKIN port


signal cable ports on GCUa/ on the SCUa board
GCGa boards in in slot 7 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

20 Trunk cable DB44/Electrical Another device Optional. The


connecting the port on the AEUa electrical port
AEUa board to board on the AEUa
other devices board is taken as
an example.
21 Y-shaped trunk Y-shaped DB44/ Another device The number of
cable connecting Electrical ports on cables to be
the AEUa board to active and standby installed and
other devices AEUa boards their actual
installation
positions
depend on the
site planning.
The
information
here is an
example based
on overhead
cabling.

3-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

22, 23 Optical cable LC/PC/Optical Another device Optional. The


connecting GOUa/ port on the GOUa/ number of
AOUa/POUa/ AOUa/POUa/ optical cables to
UOIa/GOUc/ UOIa/GOUc/ be installed and
AOUc/POUc/ AOUc/POUc/ their actual
UOIc board to UOIc board installation
other devices positions
depend on the
site planning.
The
information
here is an
example based
on overhead
cabling.

24, 25 Line clock signal SMB/2M0 or 2M1 SMB/CLKIN0 or The cable is


cable port on the AOUa/ CLKIN1 port on optional and is
POUa/UOIa/ the GCUa/GCGa installed only
GOUa/GOUc/ board in slot 12 or when the cable
AOUc/POUc/ 13 of the MPS needs to be led
UOIc/AEUa board out from the
EPS in the EPR.
When installed,
two to four
cables are
required.

26 Monitoring signal DB15/MONITOR DB9/MONITOR The cable is


cable for the 0 port on the port on the rear of mandatory and
independent fan independent fan the bottom is installed
subrack subrack subrack before delivery.
Only one
monitoring
signal cable for
the independent
fan subrack is
configured.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

4 Components of the Cabinet

About This Chapter

Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box, air defence subrack, rear cable
trough, subrack, independent fan subrack, rack.

4.1 Power Distribution Box


A power distribution box is installed inside each cabinet at the top.
4.2 Air Defence Subrack
The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through
air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.
4.3 Rear Cable Trough
The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable
trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.
4.4 Independent Fan Subrack
Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan
subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
4 Components of the Cabinet Hardware Description

4.1 Power Distribution Box


A power distribution box is installed inside each cabinet at the top.
The power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protection for the four
-48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet. Each group
has four -48 V outputs and four RTN outputs. The power distribution box also detects the status
of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible and visual alarms when faults occur.
4.1.1 Front Panel of the Power Distribution Box
The components on the front panel of the power distribution box are the panel of the Power
Allocation Monitoring Unit (PAMU) and the power switches.
4.1.2 Rear Panel of the Power Distribution Box
The components on the rear panel of the power distribution box are the power input terminal
block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to a subrack,
and a 2-hole grounding screw.
4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the Power Distribution Box
This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the
power distribution box.
4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box
The power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is a fixed relation
between the eight outputs of the power distribution box and the components of the cabinet.

4.1.1 Front Panel of the Power Distribution Box


The components on the front panel of the power distribution box are the panel of the Power
Allocation Monitoring Unit (PAMU) and the power switches.
Figure 4-1 shows the front panel of the power distribution box.

Figure 4-1 Front panel of the power distribution box

(1) Panel of the PAMU board (2) RUN LED (3) ALM LED
(4) Mute switch (5) Power switches (6) Labels for power switches

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

NOTE

l For details about the PAMU board, see 6.12 PAMU Board.
l When the power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,
indicating that the PAMU board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the
RUN and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the
power distribution box.

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.

l If you set the mute switch to I, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when
it is faulty.
l If you set the mute switch to O, the power distribution box does not generate any audible
alarm when it is faulty.

The front panel of the power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.

Table 4-1 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the power distribution box.

Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the power distribution box

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The PAMU board is functional and
1s communicates with the SCUa board
properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF The PAMU board is not working or it


for 0.25s does not communicate with the SCUa
board properly.

OFF There is no power supply to the PAMU


board or the power distribution box
does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm related to the power


distribution box.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the Power Distribution Box


The components on the rear panel of the power distribution box are the power input terminal
block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to a subrack,
and a 2-hole grounding screw.

Figure 4-2 shows the rear panel of the power distribution box.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
4 Components of the Cabinet Hardware Description

Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)

(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminal (3) Port used to connect the power
block distribution box to a subrack
(4) 2-hole grounding screw (5) J1 port (6) J2 port (port used to connect the power
distribution box to a EMU)

NOTE

l Figure 4-2 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.
l On the power input terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable
are labeled 3(-) and 1(-) respectively, and the wiring terminals for the RTN power cable are labeled 3
(+) and 1(+) respectively.
l On the power output terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable
and RTN power cable are labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+), respectively.

4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the Power Distribution Box


This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the
power distribution box.

Table 4-2 describes the technical specifications of the power distribution box.

Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)

Item Sub-item Specification

Input Rated input voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -72 V DC

Input mode Two groups of power inputs: A and B. Group A


consists of the power inputs A1+A2 and A3. Group
B consists of the power inputs B1+B2 and B3. Each
group has one or two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power
inputs.

Max. input current The maximum rated input current of each route is
100 A.

Output Rated output voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Item Sub-item Specification

Output voltage -40 V DC to -72 V DC


range

Output mode and Two groups of power outputs: A and B. Each group
current has one to four -48 V DC or -60 V DC power
outputs. The maximum rated output current of each
output is 50 A and that of each group is 100 A.
Each output is controlled by MCBs: A7 to A10 and
B7 to B10. These MCBs provide the power surge
protection function.

Output protection The power surge protection point is 70 A. You need


specifications to manually switch on the corresponding MCB
after the power surge protection.

Rated output power 9,600 W (Two groups of power outputs: A and B.


Each group has two -48 V DC power outputs.)
NOTE
For group A, power inputs A1+A2 correspond to power outputs A1 to A8, and power input A3 corresponds
to power outputs A9 and A10. Similarly, for group B, power inputs B1+B2 correspond to power outputs
B1 to B8, and power input B3 corresponds to power outputs B9 and B10.

4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box


The power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is a fixed relation
between the eight outputs of the power distribution box and the components of the cabinet.
Figure 4-3 shows the relation between the eight power switches on the power distribution box
and the components in the MPR. Table 4-3 describes the relation between the eight power
switches on the power distribution box and the components in the MPR.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
4 Components of the Cabinet Hardware Description

Figure 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR

Table 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR
Component Power Switch

Subrack 2 A8, B8

Subrack 1 A9, B9

Subrack 0 A10, B10

Independent fan subrack A7, B7

4.2 Air Defence Subrack


The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through
air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.

Physical appearance
Figure 4-4 shows the air defence subrack.

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-4 Air defence subrack

Dimensions
The dimensions of the air defence subrack are 44.45 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 476.1 mm
(depth).

4.3 Rear Cable Trough


The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable
trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.

Figure 4-5 shows the rear cable trough.

Figure 4-5 Rear cable trough

4.4 Independent Fan Subrack


Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan
subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

4.4.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack


The independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.
4.4.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
4 Components of the Cabinet Hardware Description

The technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight,
power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC).

4.4.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack


The independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.
The fan box can be configured with either the PFCU or the PFCB board, which does not affect
the appearance of the independent fan subrack.

Front View of the Independent Fan Subrack

Figure 4-6 Front view of the independent fan subrack

(1) PFCB or PFCU board (2) Fans (3) Handle of the independent fan subrack
(4) Screw (5) LED on the fan box

NOTE

l The PFCU or the PFCB is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.14
PFCU Board. For details on the PFCB board, see 6.15 PFCB Board.
l When the PFCU board is configured in the fan box of the independent fan subrack, the LEDs on the
fan box of the independent fan subrack are the same as those on the fan box in service subracks. For
details, see 5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board).
l When the PFCB board is configured in the fan box of the independent fan subrack, the LEDs on the
fan box of the independent fan subrack are the same as those on the fan box in service subracks. For
details, see 5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board).

4-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Rear View of the Independent Fan Subrack

Figure 4-7 Rear view of the independent fan subrack

(1) Monitor 1 Port, used to connect to the power (2) Power input port (3) Monitor 2 Port (Reserved)
distribution box
(4) Monitor 0 Port, used to connect to subracks (5) Monitor 3 Port (Reserved)

4.4.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack


The technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight,
power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC).
Table 4-4 describes the technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.

Table 4-4 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack


Item Specification

Dimensions 86.1 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Weight Empty subrack: ≤ 2.4 kg; subrack with fan boxes: ≤ 6.9
kg

Power supply -48 V DC. The input voltage ranges from -40 V DC to -60
V DC.

Maximum power consumption ≤ 150 W

Fan speed < 5.0 m/s

EMC Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.2.1


(2000-03).

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

5 Subracks

About This Chapter

This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an
independent unit.

5.1 Classification of Subracks


Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS) and extended
processing subrack (EPS).
5.2 Components of the Subrack
The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.
5.3 Fan Box
The fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fan
box.
5.4 Slots in the Subrack
The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front
and rear sides of the backplane.
5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack
The DIP switch on the subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
5.6 Configuration of the Subrack
BSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS and EPS. This section describes the typical
configurations of these subracks.
5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack
The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space
height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
5 Subracks Hardware Description

5.1 Classification of Subracks


Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS) and extended
processing subrack (EPS).

MPS
As the main processing subrack, the MPS is configured in the MPR. Only one MPS is configured
in the BSC6900. The MPS processes the basic services of the BSC6900, performs operation and
maintenance, and provides clock signals for the system.

EPS
As the extended processing subrack, the EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. It processes the
basic services of the BSC6900.

5.2 Components of the Subrack


The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.

Structure of the Subrack


In compliance with the IEC60297 standard, each subrack is 19 inches in width and 12 U in
height. Figure 5-1 shows the structure of the subrack.

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Figure 5-1 Structure of the subrack

(1) Fan box (2) Mounting ear (3) Guide rail


(4) Front cable trough (5) Boards (6) Grounding screw

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
5 Subracks Hardware Description

(7) DC power input port (8) Port for the monitoring signal cable of the (9) Cover plate of the DIP switch
power distribution box

Components
Table 5-1 describes the components of the subrack.

Table 5-1 Components of the subrack


Component Refer to...

Fan box 5.3 Fan Box

Slots in the subrack 5.4 Slots in the Subrack

Front cable trough The front cable trough is used to lead the cables
from the front of the subrack to both sides of the
cabinet.

Backplane The backplane is used to connect the boards in


the same subrack.

5.3 Fan Box


The fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fan
box.
5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
This section describes the appearance of and LEDs on the fan box when the fan box is configured
with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specifications of the fan box.
5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)
This section describes the appearance of and LEDs on the fan box when the fan box is configured
with the PFCB board. This also describes the technical specifications of the fan box.

5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


This section describes the appearance of and LEDs on the fan box when the fan box is configured
with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specifications of the fan box.

Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.
Figure 5-2 shows the fan box.

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

(1) Power unit of the fan box (2) Fans (3) PFCU board
(4) LED on the fan box (5) Screws (6) Handles of the fan box

NOTE

l The power unit is inserted into the rear part of the fan box. It provides power supply for nine fans and
keeps the voltage stable through a stabilizing tube, to ensure normal operations of the fans.
l The PFCU board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.14 PFCU
Board.

LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.
Table 5-2 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.

Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)
Col Status Description
or

Gre ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box works normally (the fan box
en is registered).

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box works normally (the fan box
is not registered).

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
5 Subracks Hardware Description

Col Status Description


or

Red ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box is registered and has one of
the following problems:
l One-way power supply to the subrack
l Communication failure
l Fans ceasing to run or running at a too
low speed
l Fan box in an excessively high
temperature or temperature sensor
failure

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box is not registered and has one
of the following problems:
l One-way power supply to the subrack
l Fans ceasing to run or running at a too
low speed
l Fan box in an excessively high
temperature or temperature sensor
failure

NOTE

When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa board in the same
subrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box and the
SCUa board in the same subrack is not established.

Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, voltage, maximum power,
detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.

Table 5-3 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.

Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

Item Specification

Space height 1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Input voltage range -42 V DC to -60 V DC

Maximum power 150 W

Detectable temperature range -5°C to 55°C

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from
55% to 100% of the full speed.

5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

NOTE

When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fans
in the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.

5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)


This section describes the appearance of and LEDs on the fan box when the fan box is configured
with the PFCB board. This also describes the technical specifications of the fan box.

Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)


The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.

Figure 5-3 shows the fan box.

Figure 5-3 Fan box (configured with the PFCB board)

(1) PFCB Board (2) Fans (3) LED on the fan box
(4) Screw (5) Handles of the fan box

NOTE

l The PFCB board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCB board, see 6.15 PFCB
Board.

LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)


The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.

Table 5-4 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
5 Subracks Hardware Description

Table 5-4 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)
Color Status Description

Green ON for 1s and OFF for The fan box is supplied with power in
1s two ways without any fault (and is
registered).

ON for 0.25s and OFF The fan box is supplied with power in
for 0.25s two ways without any fault (not
registered).

Red ON for 1s and OFF for The fan box is registered and has one of
1s the following problems:
l One-way power supply to the
subrack
l Communication failure
l Fans ceasing to run or running at a
too low speed
l Fan box in an excessively high
temperature or temperature sensor
failure
l Speed adjustment function failure

ON for 0.25s and OFF The fan box is not registered and has one
for 0.25s of the following problems:
l One-way power supply to the
subrack
l Fans ceasing to run or running at a
too low speed
l Fan box in an excessively high
temperature or temperature sensor
failure
l Speed adjustment function failure

NOTE

When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa board in the same
subrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box and the
SCUa board in the same subrack is not established.

Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)
The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, input voltage range,
maximum power, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.
Table 5-5 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.

5-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)
Item Specification

Space height 1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC

Maximum power 150 W

Detectable temperature range -5°C to +55°C

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from
55% to 100% of the full speed.

NOTE

When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fans
in the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.

5.4 Slots in the Subrack


The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front
and rear sides of the backplane.
Figure 5-4 shows the structure of the subrack.

Figure 5-4 Structure of the subrack

(1) Front slot (2) Backplane (3) Rear slot

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
5 Subracks Hardware Description

NOTE

l Each subrack provides a total of 28 slots. The 14 slots on the front side of the backplane are numbered
from 00 to 13, and those on the rear side from 14 to 27.
l Two neighboring slots, such as slot 00 and slot 01 or slot 02 and slot 03, can be configured as a pair
of active/standby slots. A pair of active and standby boards must be installed in a pair of active and
standby slots.

5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on the subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP Switch


The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the
DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.

Appearance
Figure 5-5 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.

Figure 5-5 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP Switch


The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The
higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 5-6 describes the bits.

5-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Table 5-6 Description about the bits


Bit Description

1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the
least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit
is set to OFF, it indicates 1.

6 Odd parity check bit

7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

8 (the most significant Reserved


bit)

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting


As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd
number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.
2. Set bit 7 to ON.
3. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch. Note that the setting of bit 8
remains unchanged.
l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.
l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.
Assume that the subracks are numbered from 0 to 2 and that bit 8 is set to OFF. Table 5-7
describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.

Table 5-7 Setting of the DIP switch


Sub Bit Setting of the DIP
rack Switch
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

5.6 Configuration of the Subrack


BSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS and EPS. This section describes the typical
configurations of these subracks.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
5 Subracks Hardware Description

5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS


The MPS is configured in the MPR. Each BSC6900 cabinet must be configured with one MPS.
5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS
The EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. The BSC6900 cabinet can be configured with zero
to five EPSs.

5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS


The MPS is configured in the MPR. Each BSC6900 cabinet must be configured with one MPS.

The boards that can be installed in the MPS are the OMUa board, SCUa board, SPUa/SPUb
board, GCUa board, GCGa board, DPUb/DPUe board, AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, UOIa/
UOIc board, PEUa board, POUa/POUc board, FG2a/FG2c board, and GOUa/GOUc board.

Figure 5-6 shows the MPS in full configuration.

Figure 5-6 MPS in full configuration

NOTE

l The INT board (interface board) can be the AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, UOIa/UOIc board, PEUa
board, POUa/POUc board, FG2a/FG2c board, or GOUa/GOUc board.
l If customers purchase also the Nastar product of Huawei, customers need to install the SAU board in
the MPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby
mode). For details on how to install the SAU board, how to install the software on the SAU board, and
how to maintain the SAU board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.

5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS


The EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. The BSC6900 cabinet can be configured with zero
to five EPSs.

The boards that can be installed in the EPS are the SCUa board, SPUa/SPUb board, DPUb/DPUe
board, AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, UOIa/UOIc board, PEUa board, POUa/POUc board,
FG2a/FG2c board, and GOUa/GOUc board.

Figure 5-7 shows the EPS in full configuration.

5-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Figure 5-7 EPS in full configuration

NOTE

l The INT board (interface board) can be the AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, UOIa/UOIc board, PEUa
board, POUa/POUC board, FG2a/FG2c board, or GOUa/GOUc board.
l If customers purchase also the Nastar product of Huawei, customers need to install the SAU board in
the MPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby
mode). For details on how to install the SAU board, how to install the software on the SAU board, and
how to maintain the SAU board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.

5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack


The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space
height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.
Table 5-8 describes the technical specifications of the subrack.

Table 5-8 Technical specifications of the subrack


Item Specification

Dimensions 530.6 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Available space height 12 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight Empty subrack: 25 kg; subrack configured with boards: ≤


57 kg

Power consumption in full l MPS: ≤ 1,600 W


configuration l EPS: ≤ 1,450 W

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6 Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.


The BSC6900 boards perform different functions through the loading of different software.
Table 6-1 describes the BSC6900 boards.

Table 6-1 Classification of the BSC6900 boards


Board Logical Function Function Description Board Name

AEUa ATM - 32-port ATM over


E1/T1/J1 interface
Unit REV:a

AOUa ATM - 2-port ATM over


channelized Optical
STM-1/OC-3
interface Unit
REV:a

AOUc ATM - 4-port ATM over


channelized Optical
STM-1/OC-3
interface Unit
REV:c

DPUb UUP (UMTS RNC User UMTS RNC user plane Data Processing
plane Process) processing Unit REV:b

DPUe UUP (UMTS RNC User UMTS RNC user plane Data Processing
plane Process) processing Unit REV:e

FG2a IP - 8-port FE or 2-port


electronic GE
interface unit REV:a

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Board Logical Function Function Description Board Name

FG2c IP - 12-port FE or 4-port


electronic GE
interface unit REV:c

GCUa Clock - General Clock Unit


REV:a

GCGa Clock with GPS - General Clock Unit


with GPS REV:a

GOUa IP - 2-port packet over


GE Optical interface
Unit REV:a

GOUc IP - 4-port packet over


GE Optical interface
Unit REV:c

OMUa OAM (Operation, OM management Operation and


Administration and Maintenance Unit
Maintenance) REV:a

PEUa IP - 32-port Packet over


E1/T1/J1 interface
Unit REV:a

POUa IP - 2-port IP over


channelized Optical
STM-1/OC-3
interface Unit
REV:a

POUc IP - 4-port IP over


channelized Optical
STM-1/OC-3
interface Unit
REV:c

SCUa MAC Switching - GE Switching


network and Control
Unit REV:a

SPUa UCP (UMTS RNC Control UMTS RNC control plane Signaling
plane Process) processing Processing Unit
REV:a
RUCP (Resource Resource management
Management and UMTS and UMTS RNC control
RNC Control plane plane processing
Process)

SPUb UCP (UMTS RNC Control UMTS RNC control plane Signaling
plane Process) processing Processing Unit
REV:b

6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Board Logical Function Function Description Board Name

RUCP (Resource Resource management


Management and UMTS and UMTS RNC control
RNC Control plane plane processing
Process)

UOIa ATM - 4-port ATM/Packet


over Unchannelized
IP - Optical STM-1/
OC-3c Interface unit
REV:a

UOIc ATM - 8-port ATM/Packet


over Unchannelized
Optical STM-1/
OC-3c Interface unit
REV:c

PAMU - - Power Allocation


Monitoring Unit

PFCU - - Fan Control Unit

PFCB - - Fan Control Board

6.1 AEUa Board


AEUa refers to 32-port ATM over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The AEUa board is optional.
It can be installed either in the MPS or in the the EPS. The number of AEUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19
and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the AEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.2 AOUa Board
AOUa refers to 2-port ATM over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:a. The
AOUa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of
AOUa boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AOUa board can
be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the AOUa board can be installed
in slots 14 to 27.
6.3 AOUc Board
AOUc refers to 4-port ATM over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The
AOUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of AOUc
boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AOUc board can be
installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the AOUc board can be installed in
slots 14 to 27.
6.4 DPUb Board
DPUb refers to Data Processing Unit REV:b. The DPUb board is optional. For the MPS, two to
ten DPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27.
For the EPS, two to twelve DPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.
6.5 DPUe Board
DPUe refers to Data Processing Unit REV:e. The DPUe board is optional. For the MPS, two to
ten DPUe boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27.
For the EPS, two to twelve DPUe boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

6.6 FG2a Board


FG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board is
optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots
14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.7 FG2c Board
FG2c refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The FG2c board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of FG2c boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 19.
For the EPS, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 23.
6.8 GCUa/GCGa Board
GCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. GCGa refers to General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a.
The GCUa/GCGa board is mandatory. Two GCUa/GCGa boards must be installed in slots 12
and 13 in the MPS.
6.9 GOUa Board
GOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed depends
on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots
24 to 27. For the EPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.10 GOUc Board
GOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUc board can be installed in slots
16 to 19. For the EPS, the GOUc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23.
6.11 OMUa Board
OMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. One or two OMUa boards must be
configured in the BSC6900. The width of the OMUa board is twice the width of other boards.
Therefore, one OMUa board occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots
20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.
6.12 PAMU Board
PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power
distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU
board.
6.13 PEUa Board
PEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.
It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19
and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.14 PFCU Board
PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCU board.
6.15 PFCB Board
PFCB refers to Fan Control Board. The PFCB board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCB board.
6.16 POUa Board
POUa refers to 2-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:a. The
POUa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of POUa

6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUa board can be
installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the POUa board can be installed in
slots 14 to 27.
6.17 POUc Board
POUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The
POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of POUc
boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUc board can be
installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the POUc board can be installed in
slots 14 to 27.
6.18 SCUa Board
SCUa refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:a. The SCUa board is mandatory.
Two SCUa boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS.
6.19 SPUa Board
SPUa refers to Signaling Processing Unit REV:a. The SPUa board is optional. Two to ten SPUa
boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the SPUa boards can be installed in slots
0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the SPUa boards can be
installed in slots 0 to 5 and slots 8 to 27.
6.20 SPUb Board
SPUb refers to Signaling Processing Unit REV:b. The SPUb board is optional. Two to ten SPUb
boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the SPUb boards can be installed
in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the SPUb boards can
be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 13, and slots 14 to 27.
6.21 UOIa Board
UOIa refers to 4-port ATM/Packet over Unchannelized Optical STM-1/OC-3c Interface unit
REV:a. The UOIa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The
number of UOIa boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the UOIa
board can be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the UOIa board can be
installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.22 UOIc Board
UOIc refers to 8-port ATM/Packet over Unchannelized Optical STM-1/OC-3c Interface unit
REV:c. The UOIc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number
of UOIc boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the UOIc board can
be installed in slots 16 to 19. For the EPS, the UOIc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

6.1 AEUa Board


AEUa refers to 32-port ATM over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The AEUa board is optional.
It can be installed either in the MPS or in the the EPS. The number of AEUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19
and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the AEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the AEUa boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.1.1 Functions of the AEUa Board


As an interface board, the AEUa board supports ATM over E1/T1/J1 transmission.
6.1.2 Panel of the AEUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the AEUa board.
6.1.3 LEDs on the AEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.1.4 Ports on the AEUa Board
There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the AEUa board.
6.1.5 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board
The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
6.1.6 Technical Specifications of the AEUa Board
The technical specifications of the AEUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

6.1.1 Functions of the AEUa Board


As an interface board, the AEUa board supports ATM over E1/T1/J1 transmission.

The AEUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides 32 channels of ATM over E1s/T1s/J1s


l Provides 32 IMA groups or 32 UNI links
l Supports the Iub interfaces
l Provides the fractional ATM and the fractional IMA functions
l Supports the timeslot cross-connection function
l Receives clock signals from the Iu interface and transmits clock signals to the GCUa/GCGa
board

6.1.2 Panel of the AEUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the AEUa board.

Figure 6-1 shows the panel of the AEUa board.

6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-1 Panel of the AEUa board

6.1.3 LEDs on the AEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-2 describes the LEDs on the AEUa board.

Table 6-2 LEDs on the AEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

6.1.4 Ports on the AEUa Board


There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the AEUa board.
Table 6-3 describes the ports on the AEUa board.

Table 6-3 Ports on the AEUa board


Port Function Connector Type

E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/ DB44
T1 signals on channels 0-7

E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/ DB44
T1 signals on channels 8-15

E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/ DB44
T1 signals on channels 16-23

E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/ DB44
T1 signals on channels 24-31

2M0 and 2M1 Ports for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male
connector

6.1.5 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board


The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 6-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board.

6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 6-2, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-
board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 6-2 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the AEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

Description of the DIP Switches


DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the AEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 6-4 describes S2, S4, S6,
S8, and S10.

Table 6-4 Description of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

S2 1-8 TX ground switch ON Setting the working


of E1s/T1s/J1s 24 mode to E1 unbalanced
to 31 mode

OFF Setting the working


mode to other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch ON Setting the working


of E1s/T1s/J1s 16 mode to E1 unbalanced
to 23 mode

OFF Setting the working


mode to other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch ON Setting the working


of E1s/T1s/J1s 0 mode to E1 unbalanced
to 7 mode

OFF Setting the working


mode to other modes

6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

S8 1-8 TX ground switch ON Setting the working


of E1s/T1s/J1s 8 mode to E1 unbalanced
to 15 mode

OFF Setting the working


mode to other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for (ON, ON) Setting the working
setting the mode to E1 unbalanced
working mode, mode
consisting of two
bits (OFF, ON) Setting the working
mode to E1 balanced
mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the working


mode to T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the working


mode to J1 mode

NOTE

All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are
set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.

6.1.6 Technical Specifications of the AEUa Board


The technical specifications of the AEUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

Table 6-5 describes the hardware specifications of the AEUa board.

Table 6-5 Hardware specifications of the AEUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 27.87 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Item Specification

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-6 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-6 Specifications of the board processing capability


Item Specification

Iub Speech service in the CS domain 2,800 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 680 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput 45 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 45 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 90 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

6.2 AOUa Board


AOUa refers to 2-port ATM over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:a. The
AOUa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of
AOUa boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AOUa board can
be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the AOUa board can be installed
in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the AOUa boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.2.1 Functions of the AOUa Board


As an optical interface board, the AOUa board supports ATM over channelized STM-1/OC-3
transmission.
6.2.2 Panel of the AOUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the AOUa board.
6.2.3 LEDs on the AOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.2.4 Ports on the AOUa Board

6-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the AOUa board.
6.2.5 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board
The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.
6.2.6 Technical Specifications of the AOUa Board
The technical specifications of the AOUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

6.2.1 Functions of the AOUa Board


As an optical interface board, the AOUa board supports ATM over channelized STM-1/OC-3
transmission.
The AOUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides two channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on ATM
l Provides the AAL2 switching function
l Provides the IMA and the UNI functions
l Supports the Iub interfaces
l Supports the extraction of line clock signals

6.2.2 Panel of the AOUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the AOUa board.
Figure 6-3 shows the panel of the AOUa board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-3 Panel of the AOUa board

6.2.3 LEDs on the AOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-7 describes the LEDs on the AOUa board.

Table 6-7 LEDs on the AOUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

6-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

6.2.4 Ports on the AOUa Board


There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the AOUa board.
Table 6-8 describes the ports on the AOUa board.

Table 6-8 Ports on the AOUa board


Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical LC/PC


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
TX and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

2M0 and Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male connector
2M1

6.2.5 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board


The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 6-4 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-4 Layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

CAUTION
All DIP switches of the AOUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is
faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP Switches


Table 6-9 describes the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

Table 6-9 Description of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

DIP Switch Bit Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Setting loading mode to JTAG


configuration

(OFF, OFF) Setting loading mode to CPU slave parallel


configuration

6-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

DIP Switch Bit Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

3 ON Setting working mode to T1 mode

OFF Setting working mode to E1 mode

4 ON Setting the mapped path to AU3

OFF Setting the mapped path to AU4

5 ON Setting the information structure to TU11

OFF Setting the information structure to TU12

6 ON SONET

OFF SDH

7 - Reserved

8 - Reserved

NOTE

All the bits of the two DIP switches are set to OFF by default.

6.2.6 Technical Specifications of the AOUa Board


The technical specifications of the AOUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-10 describes the hardware specifications of the AOUa board.

Table 6-10 Hardware specifications of the AOUa board


Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane
of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power 37.30 W
consumption

Weight 1.30 kg

Operating 0°C to 45°C


temperature
(long-term)

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Item Specification

Operating -5°C to +55°C


temperature
(short-term)

Relative 5% to 85%
humidity (long-
term)

Relative 5% to 95%
humidity (short-
term)

Table 6-11 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-11 Specifications for the board processing capability

Item Specification

Iub Speech service in the CS 9,000 Erlang


domain

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput 195 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 195 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 390 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

Table 6-12 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the AOUa board.

Table 6-12 Specifications of the optical ports on the AOUa board

Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

6-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Maximum 2 km 15 km 40 km
optical
transmission
distance

Maximum -14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm


receiver
sensitivity

Center 1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm


wavelength

Transmission 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s


rate

6.3 AOUc Board


AOUc refers to 4-port ATM over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The
AOUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of AOUc
boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AOUc board can be
installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the AOUc board can be installed in
slots 14 to 27.

NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the AOUc boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.3.1 Functions of the AOUc Board


As an optical interface board, the AOUc board supports ATM over channelized STM-1/OC-3
transmission.
6.3.2 Panel of the AOUc Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the AOUc board.
6.3.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
6.3.4 Ports on the AOUc Board
There are four optical ports on the AOUc board.
6.3.5 Technical Specifications of the AOUc Board

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

The technical specifications of the AOUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

6.3.1 Functions of the AOUc Board


As an optical interface board, the AOUc board supports ATM over channelized STM-1/OC-3
transmission.
The AOUc board performs the following functions:
l Provides four channels over the channelized STM-1/OC-3 optical ports
l Supports the IMA function
l Supports the extraction of line clock signals
l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

6.3.2 Panel of the AOUc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the AOUc board.
Figure 6-5 shows the panel of the AOUc board.

6-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-5 Panel of the AOUc board

6.3.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-13 describes the LEDs on the AOUc board.

Table 6-13 LEDs on the AOUc board

LED Colo Status Description


r

RUN Gree ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.


n

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

LED Colo Status Description


r

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.


0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Gree ON The board is in active mode.


n
OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Gree ON The STM-1 port does not receive


n signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

6.3.4 Ports on the AOUc Board


There are four optical ports on the AOUc board.
Table 6-14 describes the ports on the AOUc board.

Table 6-14 Ports on the AOUc board


Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical LC/PC


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
TX and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

6.3.5 Technical Specifications of the AOUc Board


The technical specifications of the AOUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-15 describes the hardware specifications of the AOUc board.

6-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-15 Hardware specifications of the AOUc board


Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane
of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power 75.19 W
consumption

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating 0°C to 45°C


temperature
(long-term)

Operating -5°C to +55°C


temperature
(short-term)

Relative 5% to 85%
humidity (long-
term)

Relative 5% to 95%
humidity (short-
term)

Table 6-16 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-16 Specifications of the board processing capability


Item Specification

Iub Speech service in the CS 18,000 Erlang


domain

Data service in the CS domain 5,500 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput 300 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 300 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 600 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

Iur Speech service in the CS 18,000 Erlang


domain

Data service in the CS domain 5,500 Erlang

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Item Specification

Maximum payload throughput 300 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 300 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 600 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS 18,000 Erlang


domain

Data service in the CS domain 5,500 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput 350 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 350 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 700 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

Table 6-17 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the AOUc board.

Table 6-17 Specifications of the optical ports on the AOUc board


Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum 2 km 15 km 40 km
optical
transmission
distance

Maximum -14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm


output optical
power

6-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Minimum -19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm


receiver
sensitivity

Center 1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm


wavelength

Transmission 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s


rate

6.4 DPUb Board


DPUb refers to Data Processing Unit REV:b. The DPUb board is optional. For the MPS, two to
ten DPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27.
For the EPS, two to twelve DPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the DPUb boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.4.1 Functions of the DPUb Board


The DPUb board processes and distributes the UMTS user-plane service data.
6.4.2 Panel of the DPUb Board
There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUb board.
6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUb Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUb Board
The technical specifications of the DPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

6.4.1 Functions of the DPUb Board


The DPUb board processes and distributes the UMTS user-plane service data.

The DPUb board performs the following functions:

l Multiplexes and demultiplexes


l Processes frame protocols
l Selects and distributes data
l Performs the functions of the GTP-U, IUUP, PDCP, RLC, MAC, and FP protocols

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

l Performs encryption, decryption, and paging


l Processes internal communication protocols between the SPUa/SPUb board and the DPUb
board
l Processes the Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service (MBMS) at the RLC layer and
the MAC layer

6.4.2 Panel of the DPUb Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUb board.
Figure 6-6 shows the panel of the DPUb board.

Figure 6-6 Panel of the DPUb board

6-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUb Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-18 describes the LEDs on the DPUb board.

Table 6-18 LEDs on the DPUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUb Board


The technical specifications of the DPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-19 describes the technical specifications of the DPUb board.

Table 6-19 Technical specifications of the DPUb board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 60 W

Weight 1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Item Specification

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability Supporting the UL+DL data stream at 115 Mbit/


s; supporting 1,800 Erlang for CS speech
service; supporting 900 Erlang for CS data
service; supporting 150 cells

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

6.5 DPUe Board


DPUe refers to Data Processing Unit REV:e. The DPUe board is optional. For the MPS, two to
ten DPUe boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27.
For the EPS, two to twelve DPUe boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.5.1 Functions of the DPUe Board


The DPUe board processes UMTS voice services and data services.
6.5.2 Panel of the DPUe Board
There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUe board.
6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUe Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUe Board
The technical specifications of the DPUe board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

6.5.1 Functions of the DPUe Board


The DPUe board processes UMTS voice services and data services.

The DPUe board performs the following functions:


l Selects and distributes data
l Multiplexes and demultiplexes
l Processes frame protocols
l Performs the functions of the GTP-U, IUUP, PDCP, RLC, MAC, and FP protocols
l Performs encryption, decryption, and paging
l Processes internal communication protocols between the SPUa/SPUb board and the DPUe
board

6-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Processes the Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service (MBMS) at the RLC layer and
the MAC layer

6.5.2 Panel of the DPUe Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUe board.

Figure 6-7 shows the panel of the DPUe board.

Figure 6-7 Panel of the DPUe board

6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUe Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-20 describes the LEDs on the DPUe board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Table 6-20 LEDs on the DPUe board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUe Board


The technical specifications of the DPUe board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
Table 6-21 describes the technical specifications of the DPUe board.

Table 6-21 Technical specifications of the DPUe board


Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 62.32 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

6-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Processing capability Supporting the UL+DL data stream at 335 Mbit/


s; supporting 3,350 Erlang for CS speech
service; supporting 1,675 Erlang for CS data
service; supporting 300 cells

6.6 FG2a Board


FG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board is
optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots
14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a Board


As an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.
6.6.2 Panel of the FG2a Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.
6.6.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.6.4 Ports on the FG2a Board
There are six 10M/100M Ethernet ports, two 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, and two clock
signal output ports on the FG2a board.
6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board
The technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a Board


As an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.
The FG2a board performs the following functions:
l Provides eight channels over FE ports or two channels over GE ports
l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer
l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

6.6.2 Panel of the FG2a Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-8 shows the panel of the FG2a board.

Figure 6-8 Panel of the FG2a board

6.6.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-22 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.

6-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-22 LEDs on the FG2a board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.6.4 Ports on the FG2a Board


There are six 10M/100M Ethernet ports, two 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, and two clock
signal output ports on the FG2a board.
Table 6-23 describes the ports on the FG2a board.

Table 6-23 Ports on the FG2a board


Port Function Connector
Type

FE(1) to FE(3) 10M/100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit RJ45


10/100M signals

FE/GE(0) 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to RJ45


transmit 10/100/1000M signals

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Port Function Connector


Type

2M0 and 2M1 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male
connector

6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board


The technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
Table 6-24 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2a board.

Table 6-24 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board


Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 38.48 W

Weight 1.36 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-25 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-25 Specifications of the board processing capability


Item Specification

Iub Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

6-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Maximum payload throughput (UL 840 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 840 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 840 Mbit/s


+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

6.7 FG2c Board


FG2c refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The FG2c board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of FG2c boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 19.
For the EPS, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 23.

NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the FG2c boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board


As an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
6.7.2 Panel of the FG2c Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.
6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.7.4 Ports on the FG2c Board
There are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2c board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board


The technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board


As an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
The FG2c board performs the following functions:
l Provides 12 channels over FE ports or four channels over GE ports
l Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer
l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l Supports the transmission of data over all its Ethernet ports on the basis of the synchronized
clock signals
l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces
NOTE
The FG2c board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.

6.7.2 Panel of the FG2c Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.
Figure 6-9 shows the panel of the FG2c board.

6-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-9 Panel of the FG2c board

6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-26 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

Table 6-26 LEDs on the FG2c board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.7.4 Ports on the FG2c Board


There are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2c board.
Table 6-27 describes the ports on the FG2c board.

Table 6-27 Ports on the FG2c board


Port Function Connector
Type

100BASE-T 100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100M RJ45


signals

100/1000BASE-T 100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to RJ45


transmit 100/1000M signals

6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board


The technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

6-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

Table 6-28 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2c board.

Table 6-28 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/


standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 85.4 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-29 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-29 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Iub Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 2,600 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 2,600 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Item Specification

Data service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 1,600 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 1,600 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 3,200 Mbit/s


+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

6.8 GCUa/GCGa Board


GCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. GCGa refers to General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a.
The GCUa/GCGa board is mandatory. Two GCUa/GCGa boards must be installed in slots 12
and 13 in the MPS.
6.8.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board
The GCUa/GCGa board performs the clock function.
6.8.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.
6.8.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are 17 ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.
6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board
The technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board consist of the dimensions, power supply,
power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.

6.8.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board


The GCUa/GCGa board performs the clock function.

The GCUa/GCGa board performs the following functions:

l Extracts timing signals from the external synchronization timing port and from the
synchronization line signals, processes the timing signals, and provides the timing signals
and the reference clock for the entire system
l Performs the fast pull-in and holdover functions on the system clock
l Generates RFN signals for the system
l Supports active/standby switchover. The standby GCUa/GCGa board traces the clock
phase of the active GCUa/GCGa board. This ensures the smooth output of the clock phase
in the case of active/standby switchover.

6-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Receives and processes the clock signals and the positioning information from the GPS
card

6.8.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.
Figure 6-10 shows the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.

Figure 6-10 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa board

6.8.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-30 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Table 6-30 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

6.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are 17 ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-31 describes the ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-31 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa board


Port Function Connector Type

ANT Port for the GPS antenna. This port on the GCGa SMA male
board is used to receive the timing signals and connector
positioning information from the GPS satellite. This
port is not used on the GCUa board.

CLKOUT0 to Ports for providing synchronization clock signals. RJ45


CLKOUT9 The ten ports are used to provide 8 kHz clock signals
and 1PPS clock signals.

COM0 Reserved RJ45

COM1 Port for RS422-level 8 kHz clock signals RJ45

TESTOUT Output port for clock signals. The clock signals are SMB male
used for testing. connector

TESTIN Input port for testing external clock signals SMB male
connector

CLKIN0 and Input port for BITS clock signals and line clock SMB male
CLKIN1 signals connector

6-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board


The technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board consist of the dimensions, power supply,
power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.
Table 6-32 describes the technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-32 Technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board


Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption GCUa: 20 W; GCGa: 25 W

Weight GCUa: 1.1 kg; GCGa: 1.18 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C-45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Clock accuracy grade Grade three

6.9 GOUa Board


GOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed depends
on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots
24 to 27. For the EPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.
6.9.2 Panel of the GOUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.
6.9.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.9.4 Ports on the GOUa Board
There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the GOUa board.
6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board
The technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.
The GOUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides two channels over GE optical ports, which are used for IP transmission
l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

6.9.2 Panel of the GOUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.
Figure 6-11 shows the panel of the GOUa board.

Figure 6-11 Panel of the GOUa board

6-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.9.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-33 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.

Table 6-33 LEDs on the GOUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

6.9.4 Ports on the GOUa Board


There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the GOUa board.
Table 6-34 describes the ports on the GOUa board.

Table 6-34 Ports on the GOUa board


Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical LC/PC


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
TX and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

2M0 and Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male connector
2M1

6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board


The technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-35 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUa board.

Table 6-35 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board


Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane


of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 37.30 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature 0°C to 45°C


(long-term)

Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C


(short-term)

Relative humidity (long- 5% to 85%


term)

Relative humidity 5% to 95%


(short-term)

Table 6-36 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-36 Specifications of the board processing capability


Item Specification

Iub Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 840 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

6-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Maximum payload throughput (UL 840 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 840 Mbit/s


+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

Table 6-37 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board.

Table 6-37 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board


Item Specification

Optical Module 1.25 G-850 Optical Module 1.25 G-1310


nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP nm-10 km-SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum optical 0.5 km 10 km


transmission
distance

Maximum output -2.5 dBm -3.0 dBm


optical power

Minimum output -9.5 dBm -9.5 dBm


optical power

Minimum receiver -17.0 dBm -20.0 dBm


sensitivity

Overload receive 0.0 dBm -3.0 dBm


optical power

Center wavelength 850 nm 1,310 nm

Transmission rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

6.10 GOUc Board


GOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUc board can be installed in slots
16 to 19. For the EPS, the GOUc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23.

NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the GOUc boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
6.10.2 Panel of the GOUc Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.
6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
6.10.4 Ports on the GOUc Board
There are four optical ports on the GOUc board.
6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board
The technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
The GOUc board performs the following functions:
l Provides four channels over GE ports
l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces
NOTE
The GOUc board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.

6.10.2 Panel of the GOUc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.
Figure 6-12 shows the panel of the GOUc board.

6-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-12 Panel of the GOUc board

6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 6-38 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

Table 6-38 LEDs on the GOUc board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (optical Green ON The link is well connected.


port LED)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (optical Green OFF There is no data


port LED) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.10.4 Ports on the GOUc Board


There are four optical ports on the GOUc board.

Table 6-39 describes the ports on the GOUc board.

Table 6-39 Ports on the GOUc board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical LC/PC


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
TX and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board


The technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

6-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-40 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUc board.

Table 6-40 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The


backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 65.90 W

Weight 1.40 kg

Operating temperature 0°C to 45°C


(long-term)

Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C


(short-term)

Relative humidity (long- 5% to 85%


term)

Relative humidity 5% to 95%


(short-term)

Table 6-41 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-41 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Iub Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 2,600 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 2,600 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Item Specification

Data service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 1,600 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 1,600 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 3,200 Mbit/s


+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

Table 6-42 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board.

Table 6-42 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board

Item Specification

Optical Module 1.25 Optical Module 1.25 G-850


G-1310 nm-10 km-SM- nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP
ESFP

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 850 nm

Transmission rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

Transmission 10 km 0.5 km
distance

Maximum output -3 dBm -3 dBm


optical power

Minimum output -9.5 dBm -9 dBm


optical power

Minimum receiver -23 dBm -20 dBm


sensitivity

6.11 OMUa Board


OMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. One or two OMUa boards must be
configured in the BSC6900. The width of the OMUa board is twice the width of other boards.
Therefore, one OMUa board occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots
20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.

6-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE
This document describes the installation of other boards on the basis that the OMUa boards are installed in slots
20 to 23.

6.11.1 Functions of the OMUa Board


The OMUa board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance
Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
6.11.2 Panel of the OMUa Board
There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa board. In addition, there are hard
disks installed on the OMUa board.
6.11.3 LEDs on the OMUa Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD.
6.11.4 Ports on the OMUa Board
There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC, and one
VGA port on the OMUa board.
6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa Board
This section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the
OMUa board, including size, power supply, power consumption, weight, hard disk capacity,
memory capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.

6.11.1 Functions of the OMUa Board


The OMUa board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance
Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
The OMUa board performs the following functions:
l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,
security management, and loading management functions for the system
l Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of the
BSC6900 system, to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUa
board of the BSC6900

6.11.2 Panel of the OMUa Board


There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa board. In addition, there are hard
disks installed on the OMUa board.
Figure 6-13 shows the panel of the OMUa board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-13 Panel of the OMUa board

(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever (3) Self-locking latch (4) RUN LED
(5) ALM LED (6) ACT LED (7) RESET Button (8) SHUTDOWN Button
(9) USB port (10) ETH0 Ethernet port (11) ETH1 Ethernet port (12) ETH2 Ethernet port
(13) COM port (14) VGA port (15) HD LEDs (16) OFFLINE LED
(17) Hard disks (18) Screws for fixing the hard disk

6-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l To power off the OMUa board, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers
away from the front panel of the OMUa board. After the OFFLINE LED is on, turn off the power
switch.
l The SHUTDOWN button is used only for powering off the board in emergency.
l The RESET button is used to reset the system. It works in the same way as the reset button on the PC.
l Powering off the board by pressing the SHUTDOWN button or resetting the system by pressing the
RESET button may scratch the surface of the hard disks of the OMUa board. Thus, avoid operating
the two buttons whenever possible.

6.11.3 LEDs on the OMUa Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD.
Table 6-43 describes the LEDs on the OMUa board.

Table 6-43 LEDs on the OMUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HD Green OFF There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read or


written.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

6.11.4 Ports on the OMUa Board


There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC, and one
VGA port on the OMUa board.

Table 6-44 describes the ports on the OMUa board.

Table 6-44 Ports on the OMUa board

Port Function Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3 USB ports. These ports are used to -


connect USB devices.

ETH0 to ETH2 GE ports RJ45

COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC Serial port. This port is used for DB9


system commissioning or for
common serial port usage.

VGA Port for the video -

6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa Board


This section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the
OMUa board, including size, power supply, power consumption, weight, hard disk capacity,
memory capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.

Hardware Configuration Indexes


Table 6-45 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa board.

Table 6-45 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa board

Index Index of the OMUa Board

Size 366.7 mm x 220 mm

Power supply Two routes of -48 V DC in redundancy backup mode


(provided by the backplane of the subrack)

Power consumption 120 W

Weight 4.0 kg

Hard disk capacity 146 GB x 2 (RAID 1)

Memory capacity 2 GB

Temperature required when 5°C - 40°C


working for a long time

Temperature required when 0°C - 50°C


working for a short time

6-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Index Index of the OMUa Board

Relative humidity required when 5%-85%


working for a long time

Relative humidity required when 5%-95%


working for a short time

Performance Counters
Table 6-46 describes the performance counters of the OMUa board.

Table 6-46 Performance counters of the OMUa board


Counter Index of the OMUa Board

Number of recorded The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000.


alarms

Time when the standby The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the active
OMU data is OMU board every second.
synchronized with the
active OMU data

Duration of the Five minutes. The time needed for the synchronization varies
synchronization between according to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.
the active OMU files and
standby OMU files

Duration of the Duration from when the request for OMU switchover is accepted
switchover between the to when the switchover is finished. This duration lasts for two to
active and standby OMUs three minutes.

Duration of the OMU Duration of the OMU restart due to OMU fault. This duration
restart lasts for about three minutes.

6.12 PAMU Board


PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power
distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU
board.

6.12.1 Functions of the PAMU Board


The PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900
cabinet.
6.12.2 Panel of the PAMU Board
On the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.
6.12.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board
There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

6.12.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board


The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board
The technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, and weight.

6.12.1 Functions of the PAMU Board


The PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900
cabinet.

The PAMU board performs the following functions:

l Detects the voltage of six -48 V power inputs and reports related alarms
l Detects the status of the power switches for 20 power outputs and reports related alarms
l Enables the switchover when faults occur in the serial port communication, and
communicates with the SCUa board
l Provides two RS485 and two RS232 asynchronous serial ports

6.12.2 Panel of the PAMU Board


On the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.

Figure 6-14 shows the panel of the PAMU board.

Figure 6-14 Panel of the PAMU board

(1) RUN LED (2) ALM LED (3) Mute switch

6-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.


l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is
faulty.
l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when
it is faulty.

6.12.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board


There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

Table 6-47 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.

Table 6-47 LEDs on the PAMU board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The PAMU board is functional and
1s communicates with the SCUa board
properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF The PAMU board is faulty or it does not
for 0.25s communicate with the SCUa board
properly.

OFF The power supply to the PAMU board


is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

6.12.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board


The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

Figure 6-15 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.

Figure 6-15 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.
To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table
6-48.

Table 6-48 DIP switch on the PAMU board


Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 6-48.

6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board


The technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, and weight.
Table 6-49 describes the technical specifications of the PAMU board.

Table 6-49 Technical specifications of the PAMU board


Item Specification

Dimensions 340 mm × 72 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode

Power consumption 15 W

Weight 0.2 kg

6.13 PEUa Board


PEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.
It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19
and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.13.1 Functions of the PEUa Board


As an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.
6.13.2 Panel of the PEUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.
6.13.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.13.4 Ports on the PEUa Board
There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the PEUa board.
6.13.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board
The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
6.13.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board
The technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

6.13.1 Functions of the PEUa Board


As an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.
The PEUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides 32 channels of IP over PPP/MLPPP over E1/T1
l Provides 128 PPP links or 32 MLPPP groups, each MLPPP group containing 8 MLPPP
links
l Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby PEUa
boards
l Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 channels of E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission
rate is 2.048 Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.
l Supports the Iub interfaces

6.13.2 Panel of the PEUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.
Figure 6-16 shows the panel of the PEUa board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-16 Panel of the PEUa board

6.13.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-50 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Table 6-50 LEDs on the PEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

6-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

6.13.4 Ports on the PEUa Board


There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the PEUa board.
Table 6-51 describes the ports on the PEUa board.

Table 6-51 Ports on the PEUa board


Port Function Connector
Type

E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 DB44
signals on channels 0-7

E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 DB44
signals on channels 8-15

E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 DB44
signals on channels 16-23

E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 DB44
signals on channels 24-31

2M0 and 2M1 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male
connector

6.13.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board


The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
Figure 6-17 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-17 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

6-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 6-17, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-
board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 6-17 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 6-52 describes the DIP
switches on the PEUa board.

Table 6-52 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board

DIP Bit Description Setting of DIP Meaning


Switc Switch
h

S2 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

DIP Bit Description Setting of DIP Meaning


Switc Switch
h

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting the (ON, ON) Setting the
working mode, working mode to
consisting of two bits E1 unbalanced
mode

(OFF, ON) Setting the


working mode to
E1 balanced
mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the


working mode to
T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the


working mode to
J1 mode

NOTE

All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are
set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.

6.13.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board


The technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
Table 6-53 describes the hardware specifications of the PEUa board.

Table 6-53 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board


Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

6-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 27.53 W

Weight 1.30 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-54 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-54 Specifications of the board processing capability


Item Specification

Iub Speech service in the CS domain 2,800 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 850 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput 60 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 60 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 120 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

6.14 PFCU Board


PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCU board.

6.14.1 Functions of the PFCU Board


The PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.
6.14.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board
The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
6.14.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board
The technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed
adjustment.

6.14.1 Functions of the PFCU Board


The PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.
The PFCU board performs the following functions:
l Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through the
LED
l Communicates with the SCUa board, to report the working status of the fan box
l Collects temperature information and detects the temperature through temperature sensors
l Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fan
speed
l Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED

6.14.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board


The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 6-18 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 6-18 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 6-55. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the
address of the PFCU board is 1.

6-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-55 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Description


Switch

SW1 1 (the least significant OFF 1


bit)

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 6-19 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 6-19 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 6-56. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the
address of the PFCU board is 4.

Table 6-56 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Description


Switch

SW1 1 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1

4 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

6.14.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board


The technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed
adjustment.
Table 6-57 describes the technical specifications of the PFCU board.

Table 6-57 Technical specifications of the PFCU board


Item Specification

Dimensions 270 mm x 35 mm

Input voltage range -42 V DC to -60 V DC

Frequency of PWM signals 1 kHz

Detectable temperature range -5°C to +55°C (basic requirement)

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%
to 100% of the full speed.

6.15 PFCB Board


PFCB refers to Fan Control Board. The PFCB board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCB board.

6.15.1 Functions of the PFCB Board


The PFCB board is used to monitor the fan box.
6.15.2 Pins on the PFCB Board
The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,
these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these
pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.
6.15.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board
The technical specifications of the PFCB board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signals, detectable temperature range, and
requirement for fan speed adjustment.

6.15.1 Functions of the PFCB Board


The PFCB board is used to monitor the fan box.
The PFCB board performs the following functions:
l Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through the
LED
l Communicates with the SCUa board, to report the working status of the fan box, and
responds to the fan speed adjustment command
l Collects temperature information through temperature sensors and intelligently adjusts the
fan speed based on the temperature information

6-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fan
speed
l Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED

6.15.2 Pins on the PFCB Board


The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,
these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these
pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.

Pins on the PFCB Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 6-20 shows the pins on the PFCB board.

Figure 6-20 Pins on the PFCB board

To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described
in Table 6-58.

Table 6-58 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
Pin 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Numb
er

Connec No No No No Yes No No No
ted to
jumper

Pins on the PFCB Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)


Figure 6-21 shows the pins on the PFCB board.

Figure 6-21 Pins on the PFCB board

To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described
in Table 6-59.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Table 6-59 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack)

Pin 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16


Numb
er

Connec No No No No No No Yes No
ted to
jumper

NOTE

The pins on the PFCB board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

6.15.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board


The technical specifications of the PFCB board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signals, detectable temperature range, and
requirement for fan speed adjustment.

Table 6-60 describes the technical specifications of the PFCB board.

Table 6-60 Technical specifications of the PFCB board

Item Specification

Dimensions 390 mm × 50 mm

Input voltage range -42 V DC to -60 V DC

Frequency of PWM signals 1 kHz

Detectable temperature range -5°C to +55°C (basic requirement)

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%
to 100% of the full speed.

6.16 POUa Board


POUa refers to 2-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:a. The
POUa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of POUa
boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUa board can be
installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the POUa board can be installed in
slots 14 to 27.

NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the POUa boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.16.1 Functions of the POUa Board


As an interface board, the POUa board supports channelized STM-1/OC-3 transmission based
on IP protocol.

6-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.16.2 Panel of the POUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUa board.
6.16.3 LEDs on the POUa Board
There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.16.4 Ports on the POUa Board
There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the POUa board.
6.16.5 DIP Switches on the POUa Board
The POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.
6.16.6 Technical Specifications of the POUa Board
The technical specifications of the POUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

6.16.1 Functions of the POUa Board


As an interface board, the POUa board supports channelized STM-1/OC-3 transmission based
on IP protocol.
The POUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides two channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on IP protocol
l Supports IP over E1/T1 over SDH/SONET
l Provides MLPPP groups.
l Supports 126 E1s or 168 T1s
l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby POUa boards
l Supports the Iub interfaces
l Supports the extraction of line clock signals

6.16.2 Panel of the POUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUa board.
Figure 6-22 shows the panel of the POUa board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-22 Panel of the POUa board

6.16.3 LEDs on the POUa Board


There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-61 describes the LEDs on the POUa board.

Table 6-61 LEDs on the POUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

6-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

6.16.4 Ports on the POUa Board


There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the POUa board.
Table 6-62 describes the ports on the POUa board.

Table 6-62 Ports on the POUa board


Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical LC/PC


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
TX and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

2M0 and Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male connector
2M1

6.16.5 DIP Switches on the POUa Board


The POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 6-23 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-23 Layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

6-76 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

CAUTION
All the DIP switches on the POUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel
is faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP Switches


Table 6-63 describes the DIP switches on the POUa board.

Table 6-63 Description of the DIP switches on the POUa board


DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Bit Meaning

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Setting loading mode


to JTAG configuration

(OFF, OFF) Setting loading mode


to CPU slave parallel
configuration

3 ON Setting working mode


to T1 mode

OFF Setting working mode


to E1 mode

4 ON Setting the mapped


path to AU3

OFF Setting the mapped


path to AU4

5 ON Setting the
information structure
to TU11

OFF Setting the


information structure
to TU12

6 ON SONET

OFF SDH

7 - Reserved

8 - Reserved

NOTE

All the bits of the two DIP switches are set to OFF by default.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

6.16.6 Technical Specifications of the POUa Board


The technical specifications of the POUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-64 describes the hardware specifications of the POUa board.

Table 6-64 Hardware specifications of the POUa board


Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 43.14 W

Weight 1.30 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-65 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-65 Specifications of the board processing capability


Item Specification

Iub Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 1,500 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput 120 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 120 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 240 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

6-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

Table 6-66 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the POUa board.

Table 6-66 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUa board

Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum 2 km 15 km 40 km
optical
transmission
distance

Maximum -14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm


receiver
sensitivity

Center 1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm


wavelength

Transmission 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s


rate

6.17 POUc Board


POUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The
POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of POUc
boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUc board can be
installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the POUc board can be installed in
slots 14 to 27.

NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.17.1 Functions of the POUc Board

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

As an interface board, the POUc board supports IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3 transmission.
6.17.2 Panel of the POUc Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.
6.17.3 LEDs on the POUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
6.17.4 Ports on the POUc Board
There are four optical ports on the POUc board.
6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board
The technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

6.17.1 Functions of the POUc Board


As an interface board, the POUc board supports IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3 transmission.
The POUc board performs the following functions:
l Provides four channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on IP protocol
l Supports the PPP function
l Extracts line clock signals
l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby POUc boards
l Supports the Iur, and Iub interfaces

6.17.2 Panel of the POUc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.
Figure 6-24 shows the panel of the POUc board.

6-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-24 Panel of the POUc board

6.17.3 LEDs on the POUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-67 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.

Table 6-67 LEDs on the POUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.


0.125s

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

6.17.4 Ports on the POUc Board


There are four optical ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-68 describes the ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-68 Ports on the POUc board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical LC/PC


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
TX and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board


The technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

Table 6-69 describes the hardware specifications of the POUc board.

Table 6-69 Hardware specifications of the POUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

6-82 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 77.25 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-70 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-70 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Iub Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput 400 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 400 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 800 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput 400 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 400 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 800 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Table 6-71 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-71 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board


Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum 2 km 15 km 40 km
optical
transmission
distance

Maximum -14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm


receiver
sensitivity

Center 1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm


wavelength

Transmission 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s


rate

6.18 SCUa Board


SCUa refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:a. The SCUa board is mandatory.
Two SCUa boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS.

6.18.1 Functions of the SCUa Board


The SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the
subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and
the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between modules of the BSC6900.
6.18.2 Panel of the SCUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board.
6.18.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

6-84 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.18.4 Ports on the SCUa Board


There are twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, one COM port, one clock signal input port, and
one TESTOUT port on the SCUa board.
6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board
The technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.

6.18.1 Functions of the SCUa Board


The SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the
subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and
the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between modules of the BSC6900.
The SCUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides the maintenance management function
l Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900
l Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinet
l Supports the port trunking function
l Supports the active/standby switchover
l Enables inter-subrack connections
l Provides a total switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s
l Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900

6.18.2 Panel of the SCUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board.
Figure 6-25 shows the panel of the SCUa board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Figure 6-25 Panel of the SCUa board

6.18.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-72 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.

Table 6-72 LEDs on the SCUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

6-86 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.18.4 Ports on the SCUa Board


There are twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, one COM port, one clock signal input port, and
one TESTOUT port on the SCUa board.
Table 6-73 describes the ports on the SCUa board.

Table 6-73 Ports on the SCUa board


Port Function Connector
Type

10/100/100 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used for the inter- RJ45


0BASE-T0 subrack connection.
to
10/100/100
0BASE-T9

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Port Function Connector


Type

10/100/100 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, the two ports are unused RJ45
0BASE- in the BSC6900.
T10 to
10/100/100
0BASE-
T11

COM Serial port for commissioning. RJ45

CLKIN Port for reference clock signal inputs, used to receive the 8 RJ45
kHz and the 1 PPS clock signals from the GCUa/GCGa
board.

TESTOUT Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for SMB male
testing. connector

6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board


The technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.
Table 6-74 describes the technical specifications of the SCUa board.

Table 6-74 Technical specifications of the SCUa board


Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 54.5 W

Weight 1.2 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Switching capacity 60 Gbit/s

6.19 SPUa Board


SPUa refers to Signaling Processing Unit REV:a. The SPUa board is optional. Two to ten SPUa
boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the SPUa boards can be installed in slots

6-88 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the SPUa boards can be
installed in slots 0 to 5 and slots 8 to 27.

NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the SPUa boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.19.1 Functions of the SPUa Board


Loaded with different software, the SPUa board is functionally divided into main control SPUa
board and non-main control SPUa board. The main control SPUa board is used to manage the
UMTS user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the UMTS services on the control plane. The non-main control SPUa board is used
to process the UMTS services on the control plane.
6.19.2 Panel of the SPUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SPUa board.
6.19.3 LEDs on the SPUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.19.4 Ports on the SPUa Board
There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the SPUa board.
6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUa Board
The technical specifications of the SPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.

6.19.1 Functions of the SPUa Board


Loaded with different software, the SPUa board is functionally divided into main control SPUa
board and non-main control SPUa board. The main control SPUa board is used to manage the
UMTS user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the UMTS services on the control plane. The non-main control SPUa board is used
to process the UMTS services on the control plane.

Main Control SPUa Board


The main control SPUa board has four logical subsystems.
Subsystem 0 of the main control SPUa board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to
manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the
system. The functions are described as follows:
l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources
between subracks
l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load
information on the control planes between subracks
l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-
RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query
l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane
resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900
Subsystems 1 to 3 of the main control SPUa board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which
is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the Uu, Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces
l Processing transport layer signaling
l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control SPUa Board


The non-main control SPUa board has four logical subsystems.
The four subsystems of the non-main control SPUa board belong to the CPUS, which is used to
process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l Processing upper-layer signaling over the Uu, Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces
l Processing transport layer signaling
l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l Processing RFN signaling

6.19.2 Panel of the SPUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SPUa board.
Figure 6-26 shows the panel of the SPUa board.

6-90 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-26 Panel of the SPUa board

6.19.3 LEDs on the SPUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-75 describes the LEDs on the SPUa board.

Table 6-75 LEDs on the SPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data transmission over


Ethernet port) the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

6.19.4 Ports on the SPUa Board


There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the SPUa board.
Table 6-76 describes the ports on the SPUa board.

Table 6-76 Ports on the SPUa board


Port Function

10/100/1000BASE-T0 to Ethernet ports


10/100/1000BASE-T3

6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUa Board


The technical specifications of the SPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
Table 6-77 describes the technical specifications of the SPUa board.

6-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-77 Technical specifications of the SPUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 76.60 W

Weight 1.60 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability of the main control Supporting 100 NodeBs, 300 cells, and 67,500
SPUa board BHCAs

Processing capability of the non-main Supporting 100 NodeBs, 300 cells, and 90,000
control SPUa board Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCAs)

NOTE

The preceding BHCA specification is calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. The BHCA
specification configured for an SPU depends on the actual traffic model.

6.20 SPUb Board


SPUb refers to Signaling Processing Unit REV:b. The SPUb board is optional. Two to ten SPUb
boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the SPUb boards can be installed
in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the SPUb boards can
be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 13, and slots 14 to 27.

NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the SPUb boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.20.1 Functions of the SPUb Board


Loaded with different software, the SPUb board is functionally divided into main control SPUb
board and non-main control SPUb board. The main control SPUb board is used to manage the
UMTS user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the UMTS services on the control plane. The non-main control SPUb board is used
to process the UMTS services on the control plane.
6.20.2 Panel of the SPUb Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SPUb board.
6.20.3 LEDs on the SPUb Board

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Among all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.20.4 Ports on the SPUb Board
There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the SPUb board.
6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUb Board
The technical specifications of the SPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.

6.20.1 Functions of the SPUb Board


Loaded with different software, the SPUb board is functionally divided into main control SPUb
board and non-main control SPUb board. The main control SPUb board is used to manage the
UMTS user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the UMTS services on the control plane. The non-main control SPUb board is used
to process the UMTS services on the control plane.

Main Control SPUb Board


The main control SPUb board has eight logical subsystems.

Subsystem 0 of the main control SPUb board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to
manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the
system. The functions are described as follows:

l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources
between subracks
l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load
information on the control planes between subracks
l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-
RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query
l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane
resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900

Subsystems 1 to 7 of the main control SPUb board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which
is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the Uu, Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces
l Processing transport layer signaling
l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control SPUb Board


The non-main control SPUb board has eight logical subsystems.

The eight subsystems of the non-main control SPUb board belong to the CPUS, which is used
to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the Uu, Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

6-94 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Processing transport layer signaling


l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l Processing RFN signaling

6.20.2 Panel of the SPUb Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SPUb board.
Figure 6-27 shows the panel of the SPUb board.

Figure 6-27 Panel of the SPUb board

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

6.20.3 LEDs on the SPUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-78 describes the LEDs on the SPUb board.

Table 6-78 LEDs on the SPUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data transmission over


Ethernet port) the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

6.20.4 Ports on the SPUb Board


There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the SPUb board.

Table 6-79 describes the ports on the SPUb board.

Table 6-79 Ports on the SPUb board

Port Function

10/100/1000BASE-T0 to Ethernet ports


10/100/1000BASE-T3

6-96 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUb Board


The technical specifications of the SPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
Table 6-80 describes the technical specifications of the SPUb board.

Table 6-80 Technical specifications of the SPUb board


Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 52.3 W

Weight 1.2 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability of the main control Supporting 180 NodeBs, 600 cells, and 140,000
SPUb board BHCAs

Processing capability of the non-main Supporting 180 NodeBs, 600 cells, and 140,000
control SPUb board BHCAs

NOTE

The preceding BHCA specification is calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. The BHCA
specification configured for an SPU depends on the actual traffic model.

6.21 UOIa Board


UOIa refers to 4-port ATM/Packet over Unchannelized Optical STM-1/OC-3c Interface unit
REV:a. The UOIa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The
number of UOIa boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the UOIa
board can be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the UOIa board can be
installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the UOIa boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.
6.21.1 Functions of the UOIa Board
As an optical interface board, the UOIa board supports ATM over unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c
transmission or IP over unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c transmission by loading different
applications.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

6.21.2 Panel of the UOIa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the UOIa board.
6.21.3 LEDs on the UOIa Board
There are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.21.4 Ports on the UOIa Board
There are four optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the UOIa board.
6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIa Board
The technical specifications of the UOIa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

6.21.1 Functions of the UOIa Board


As an optical interface board, the UOIa board supports ATM over unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c
transmission or IP over unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c transmission by loading different
applications.
The UOIa board performs the following functions:
l Provides four unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c optical interfaces
l Supports ATM/IP over SDH/SONET
l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby UOIa boards
l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces
l Supports the extraction of line clock signals

6.21.2 Panel of the UOIa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the UOIa board.
Figure 6-28 shows the panel of the UOIa board.

6-98 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-28 Panel of the UOIa board

6.21.3 LEDs on the UOIa Board


There are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-81 describes the LEDs on the UOIa board.

Table 6-81 LEDs on the UOIa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

6.21.4 Ports on the UOIa Board


There are four optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the UOIa board.

Table 6-82 describes the ports on the UOIa board.

Table 6-82 Ports on the UOIa board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive LC/PC


optical signals. TX refers to the transmitting
TX optical port, and RX refers to the receiving
optical port.

2M0 and Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male connector
2M1

6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIa Board


The technical specifications of the UOIa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

Table 6-83 describes the hardware specifications of the UOIa board.

Table 6-83 Hardware specifications of the UOIa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

6-100 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of


the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 30.05 W

Weight 1.15 kg

Operating temperature 0°C to 45°C


(long-term)

Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C


(short-term)

Relative humidity 5% to 85%


(long-term)

Relative humidity 5% to 95%


(short-term)

Table 6-84 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the UOIa board in ATM
transmission mode.

Table 6-84 Specifications of the processing capability of the UOIa board in ATM transmission
mode

Item Specification

Iub Speech service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 225 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 225 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 450 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 225 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 225 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 450 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 150 Mbit/s

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Item Specification

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 385 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 535 Mbit/s


+DL)

Table 6-85 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the UOIa board in IP
transmission mode.

Table 6-85 Specifications of the processing capability of the UOIa board in IP transmission
mode

Item Specification

Iub Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 1,500 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 120 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 120 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 240 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 1,500 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 120 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 120 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 240 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 1,500 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 250 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 250 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 500 Mbit/s


+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

Table 6-86 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the UOIa board.

6-102 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-86 Specifications of the optical ports on the UOIa board

Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum 2 km 15 km 40 km
optical
transmission
distance

Maximum -14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm


receiver
sensitivity

Center 1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm


wavelength

Transmission 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s


rate

6.22 UOIc Board


UOIc refers to 8-port ATM/Packet over Unchannelized Optical STM-1/OC-3c Interface unit
REV:c. The UOIc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number
of UOIc boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the UOIc board can
be installed in slots 16 to 19. For the EPS, the UOIc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23.

NOTE
If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the UOIc boards can be installed in slots 20
to 23 of the MPS.

6.22.1 Functions of the UOIc Board


As an optical interface board, the UOIc board supports ATM over unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c
transmission.
6.22.2 Panel of the UOIc Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the UOIc board.
6.22.3 LEDs on the UOIc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

6.22.4 Ports on the UOIc Board


There are eight optical ports on the UOIc board.
6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIc Board
The technical specifications of the UOIc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

6.22.1 Functions of the UOIc Board


As an optical interface board, the UOIc board supports ATM over unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c
transmission.
The UOIc board performs the following functions:
l Provides eight channels over unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c optical ports
l Supports ATM over SDH/SONET
l Supports the extraction of line clock signals
l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby UOIc boards
l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

6.22.2 Panel of the UOIc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the UOIc board.
Figure 6-29 shows the panel of the UOIc board.

6-104 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-29 Panel of the UOIc board

6.22.3 LEDs on the UOIc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-87 describes the LEDs on the UOIc board.

Table 6-87 LEDs on the UOIc board

LED Colo Status Description


r

RUN Gree ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.


n
ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.
0.125s

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

LED Colo Status Description


r

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Gree ON The board is in active mode.


n
OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Gree ON The STM-1 port does not receive


n signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

6.22.4 Ports on the UOIc Board


There are eight optical ports on the UOIc board.
Table 6-88 describes the ports on the UOIc board.

Table 6-88 Ports on the UOIc board


Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive LC/PC


optical signals. TX refers to the transmitting
TX optical port, and RX refers to the receiving
optical port.

6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIc Board


The technical specifications of the UOIc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-89 describes the hardware specifications of the UOIc board.

6-106 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-89 Hardware specifications of the UOIc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the
subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 86.52 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating 0°C to 45°C


temperature (long-
term)

Operating -5°C to +55°C


temperature (short-
term)

Relative humidity 5% to 85%


(long-term)

Relative humidity 5% to 95%


(short-term)

Table 6-90 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-90 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Iub Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 800 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 800 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 800 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 800 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 800 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 800 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
6 Boards Hardware Description

Item Specification

Data service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 900 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 900 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 1,800 Mbit/s


+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

Table 6-91 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the UOIc board.

Table 6-91 Specifications of the optical ports on the UOIc board


Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum 2 km 15 km 40 km
optical
transmission
distance

Maximum -14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm


receiver
sensitivity

Center 1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm


wavelength

Transmission 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s


rate

6-108 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7 Cables

About This Chapter

This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.

7.1 Power Cables


The power cables are mandatory and are of two categories, that is, external power cables and
internal power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.
7.2 PGND Cables
The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for
the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan
subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.
7.3 Optical Cable
The optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board to
the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.
7.4 75-ohm Coaxial Cable
The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial
cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby
AEUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk
signals.
7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of
active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1
signals.
7.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable
The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm
twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the
active/standby AEUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.
7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable
The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The
number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

connects the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/
T1 signals.
7.8 BITS Clock Cable
The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock
cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals
to the GCUa/GCGa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the
BITS clock signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock
conversion cables.
7.9 Y-Shaped Clock Cable
The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cables. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped
clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHz
clock signals from the GCUa/GCGa board in the MPS to the SCUa board in the EPS.
7.10 Line Clock Signal Cable
The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to
transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the
GCUa/GCGa board.
7.11 Straight-Through Cable
The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded
straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards
in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/
FG2c board to other devices. The number of straight-through cables to be installed depends on
the site requirements.
7.12 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack
The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the
service subracks.
7.13 Alarm Box Signal Cable
The alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You
can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the
alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.
7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box
The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from
the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.
7.15 OMU serial port cable
The OMU serial port cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.
7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable
The GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals to
the GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.
7.17 EMU RS485 Communication Cable
The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and
the EMU.

7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7.1 Power Cables


The power cables are mandatory and are of two categories, that is, external power cables and
internal power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.

Description About Power Cables


The external power cables connect the Power Distribution Frame (PDF) to the power distribution
box at the top of the cabinet. The external power cables need to be installed on site. The internal
power cables connect the power distribution box to the modules inside the cabinet. The internal
power cables are installed before the cabinet is delivered.
Table 7-1 describes the external power cables for the N68E-21-N cabinet. Table 7-2 describes
the external power cables for the N68E-22 cabinet.

Table 7-1 External power cables for the N68E-21-N cabinet


Cable Color Cross- Connector Type 1/ Connector Quantity
Name Sectional Installation Type 2/
Area Position 1 Installation
Position 2
mm2

Externa Blue 25/35 2-hole JG OT terminal/-48 Four per


l -48 V terminal/-48 V DC V DC output cabinet
power input port on the port on the PDF
cable power distribution
box

Externa Black 25/35 2-hole JG OT terminal/-48 Four per


l RTN terminal/-48 V DC V DC output cabinet
power input port on the port on the PDF
cable power distribution
box

Table 7-2 External power cables for the N68E-22 cabinet


Cable Color Cross- Connector Type 1/ Connector Quantity
Name Sectional Installation Type 2/
Area Position 1 Installation
Position 2
mm2

Externa Blue 25/35 OT terminal/-48 V OT Four per


l -48 V DC input port on the terminal/-48 V cabinet
power power distribution DC output port
cable box on the PDF

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

Cable Color Cross- Connector Type 1/ Connector Quantity


Name Sectional Installation Type 2/
Area Position 1 Installation
Position 2
mm2

Externa Black 25/35 OT terminal/-48 V OT Four per


l RTN DC input port on the terminal/-48 V cabinet
power power distribution DC output port
cable box on the PDF

NOTE

The cables delivered to different countries and regions are different in color and appearance. If engineers
are to purchase the cables in the local area, ensure that the cables purchased meet the local specifications.

The connectors of the internal power cables for the N68E-22 cabinet are the same as those for
the N68E-21-N cabinet. Table 7-3 describes the internal power cables.

Table 7-3 Internal power cables (1)

Cable Color Cross- Connector Type 1/ Connector Quantity


Name Sectional Installation Type 2/
Area Position 1 Installation
Position 2
mm2

Internal Blue 10 OT terminal/-48 V OT Two per


-48 V DC output port on terminal/-48 V subrack
DC the power DC output port
power distribution box on the subrack
cable

Internal Black 10 OT terminal/-48 V OT Two per


RTN DC output port on terminal/-48 V subrack
power the power DC output port
cable distribution box on the subrack

Table 7-4 Internal power cables (2)

Cable Color Cross- Connector Connector Quantity


Name Sectional Type 1/ Type 2/
Area Installation Installation
Position 1 Position 2
mm2

Internal Blue 2 OT D-type Two per subrack


-48 V terminal/-48 V connector/
DC DC input port power input
power on the power port on the
cable distribution independent
box fan subrack

7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Cable Color Cross- Connector Connector Quantity


Name Sectional Type 1/ Type 2/
Area Installation Installation
Position 1 Position 2
mm2

Internal Black 2 OT D-type Two per subrack


RTN terminal/-48 V connector/
power DC input port power input
cable on the power port on the
distribution independent
box fan subrack

Appearance
Figure 7-1 shows the internal power cable for subracks.

Figure 7-1 Internal power cable for subracks

(1) OT terminal

Figure 7-2 shows the internal power cable for the independent fan subrack.

Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack

Figure 7-3 shows the external power cable for the N68E-22 cabinet.

Figure 7-3 External power cable for the N68E-22 cabinet

(1) OT terminal

Figure 7-4 shows the external power cable for the N68E-21-N cabinet.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

Figure 7-4 External power cable for the N68E-21-N cabinet

(1) OT terminal (2) 2-hole JG terminal

7.2 PGND Cables


The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for
the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan
subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.
Each cabinet must be configured with one external PGND cable. When the cabinets are
combined, three inter-cabinet PGND cables must be installed between every two adjacent
cabinets. Other PGND cables are already installed in the cabinet before delivery.
Table 7-5 describes the PGND cables.

Table 7-5 PGND cables


Cable Color Cross- Connect Connector Quantity
Name Sectional or Type Type 2/
Area 1/ Installation
Installati Position 2
mm2
on
Position
1

External Green and 25/35 OT OT terminal/ One per


PGND yellow terminal/ PGND output cabinet
cable Groundin port on the PDF
g bolt at
the top
rear of
each
cabinet

Inter- Green and 6 OT OT terminal/ Three


cabinet yellow terminal/ PGND busbar of between
PGND PGND each cabinet every two
cable busbar of adjacent
each cabinets
cabinet

7-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Cable Color Cross- Connect Connector Quantity


Name Sectional or Type Type 2/
Area 1/ Installation
Installati Position 2
mm2
on
Position
1

PGND Green and 6 OT OT terminal/Port One per


cable for yellow terminal/ for PGND cable power
the power PGND on the power distribution
distributio busbar of distribution box box
n box each
cabinet

PGND Green and 6 OT OT terminal/Port Two per


cable for yellow terminal/ for the PGND subrack
the subrack PGND cable on the
busbar of subrack
each
cabinet

PGND Green and 6 OT OT terminal/ Eight per


cable for yellow terminal/ Grounding bolt cabinet
the cabinet Groundin on the cabinet
door g bolt on door
the base

PGND Green and 6 OT OT terminal/ One per


cable for yellow terminal/ Grounding point independent
the PGND of the fan subrack
independe busbar of independent fan
nt fan each subrack
subrack cabinet

The PGND cable for the independent fan subrack is different from the other PGND cables for
the BSC6900. Figure 7-5 shows the PGND cable for the independent fan subrack. Figure 7-6
shows the other PGND cables.

Figure 7-5 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack

Figure 7-6 Other PGND cables

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

7.3 Optical Cable


The optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board to
the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.

Classification of the Optical Cable


According to the types of optical connectors at both ends of the cable, the optical cable can be
classified into the following types:
l LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
l LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
l LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
NOTE

l In actual installation, the LC/PC optical connector at one end of the cable is connected to the optical
interface board in the BSC6900, and the connector type at the other end of the cable depends on site
requirements.
l The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable connects the optical interface board to the
ODF or other NEs or connects the optical interface boards.
l In practice, two optical cables form a pair. Both ends of each cable in the pair are attached with
temporary labels. If one end of the cable is connected to the TX port, the other end should be connected
to the RX port.

CAUTION
The TX end and RX end of each optical cable must be connected correctly. Otherwise, the optical
signals cannot be received or transmitted.

BSC6900 Optical Cables


Table 7-6 shows the optical cables used in the BSC6900.

Table 7-6 BSC6900 optical cables

Optical Cable Type Appearance

LC/PC-LC/PC single-
mode/multi-mode

LC/PC-FC/PC single-
mode/multi-mode

LC/PC-SC/PC single-
mode/multi-mode

7-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Installation
The optical cable has an LC/PC connector at one end connected to the optical interface board
in the BSC6900. The other end of the optical cable can use an LC/PC connector, SC/PC
connector, or FC/PC connector as required. Figure 7-7 shows the installation positions of the
optical cable.

Figure 7-7 Installation positions of the optical cable

7.4 75-ohm Coaxial Cable


The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial
cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby
AEUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk
signals.
The 75-ohm coaxial cable used in the BSC6900 has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the 75-ohm coaxial
cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All of the
16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.

Appearance
Figure 7-8 shows the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

Figure 7-8 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the
cable)
(3) Label (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector

The 75-ohm coaxial cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a connector
to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Pin Assignment
The outer shielding layer of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the metal
case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-7 describes the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors
for the micro coaxial cables of the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Table 7-7 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables

Pin of W1 Remarks Pin of W2 Remarks


DB44 DB44
Connec Signal Micro Connec Signal Micro
tor Coaxia tor Coaxia
l Cable l Cable
Identif Identif
ier ier

38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1

23 Tip 30 Tip

37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2

22 Tip 29 Tip

36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T3

21 Tip 28 Tip

35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4

20 Tip 27 Tip

34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5

7-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Pin of W1 Remarks Pin of W2 Remarks


DB44 DB44
Connec Signal Micro Connec Signal Micro
tor Coaxia tor Coaxia
l Cable l Cable
Identif Identif
ier ier

19 Tip 26 Tip

33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6

18 Tip 25 Tip

32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7

17 Tip 24 Tip

31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8

16 Tip 7 Tip

Table 7-8 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-7.

Table 7-8 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable
Signal Bearer

Ring Shielding layer of micro coaxial cables

Tip Core of micro coaxial cables

Installation
One end of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the AEUa/
PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable


The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of
active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1
signals.

Appearance
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the active/standby 75-ohm
coaxial cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All
of the 16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.
Figure 7-9 shows the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

Figure 7-9 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Metal case of the DB44 connector

(3) Label 1 (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the
cable)

(5) Label 2 (identifying a coaxial cable)

The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You need
to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Table 7-9 and Table 7-11 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/
standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Table 7-9 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4

X1 W3 Remark X1 W4 Remark
s s
Pin of Signal Micro Pin of Signal Micro
DB44 Coaxial DB44 Coaxial
Connec Cable Connec Cable
tor Identifi tor Identifi
er er

38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1

23 Tip 30 Tip

37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2

22 Tip 29 Tip

36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T3

21 Tip 28 Tip

35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4

20 Tip 27 Tip

34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5

19 Tip 26 Tip

7-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

X1 W3 Remark X1 W4 Remark
s s
Pin of Signal Micro Pin of Signal Micro
DB44 Coaxial DB44 Coaxial
Connec Cable Connec Cable
tor Identifi tor Identifi
er er

33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6

18 Tip 25 Tip

32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7

17 Tip 24 Tip

31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8

16 Tip 7 Tip

NOTE

In Table 7-9, T1 indicates the first-route E1 TX signal, and R1 indicates the first-route E1 RX signal.
Similarly, RN indicates the Nth-route E1 RX signal, and TN indicates the Nth-route E1 TX signal.

Table 7-10 describes the signals of the micro coaxial cables listed in Table 7-9.

Table 7-10 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable

Signal Bearer

Ring Shielding layer of coaxial cables

Tip Core of coaxial cables

Table 7-11 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2

W2 W1

Pin of X1 Pin of X2 Remarks Pin of X1 Pin of X2 Remarks


Connector Connector Connector Connector

38 38 PAIR 15 15 PAIR

23 23 30 30

37 37 PAIR 14 14 PAIR

22 22 29 29

36 36 PAIR 13 13 PAIR

21 21 28 28

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

W2 W1

Pin of X1 Pin of X2 Remarks Pin of X1 Pin of X2 Remarks


Connector Connector Connector Connector

35 35 PAIR 12 12 PAIR

20 20 27 27

34 34 PAIR 11 11 PAIR

19 19 26 26

33 33 PAIR 10 10 PAIR

18 18 25 25

32 32 PAIR 9 9 PAIR

17 17 24 24

31 31 PAIR 8 8 PAIR

16 16 7 7

NOTE

In Table 7-11, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shielding layer
of the twisted pair cable.

Installation
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable are connected
to the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm
coaxial cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another NE through
transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable can also be
connected to another NE directly.
Figure 7-10 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables.

Figure 7-10 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables

7-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable


The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm
twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the
active/standby AEUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.

Appearance
Figure 7-11 shows the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Figure 7-11 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of
the cable)
(3) Label (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a
connector to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Pin Assignment
The outer shielding layer of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the
metal case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-12 describes the pin assignment of the DB44
connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable
Pin of W1 Color Pin of W2 Color
DB44 DB44
Connec Signal 120- Connec Signal 120-
tor Ohm tor Ohm
Twisted Twisted
Pair Pair
Cable Cable
Identifie Identifie
r r

38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/T- T1 Blue

23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/T+ White

37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/T- T2 Orange

22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/T+ White

36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/T- T3 Green

21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/T+ White

35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/T- T4 Brown

20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/T+ White

34 Ring/R- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey

19 Tip/R+ White 26 Tip/T+ White

33 Ring/R- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue

18 Tip/R+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red

32 Ring/R- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange

17 Tip/R+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red

31 Ring/R- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green

16 Tip/R+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red

Table 7-13 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-12.

Table 7-13 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable
Signal Bearer

Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1
signals

Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1
signals

7-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Signal Bearer

Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals

Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/
T1 signals

Installation
One end of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the AEUa/
PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable


The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The
number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/
T1 signals.

Appearance
Figure 7-12 shows the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Figure 7-12 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Metal case of the DB44 connector

(3) Label 1 (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer
of the cable)

(5) Label 2 (identifying a twisted pair cable)

The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You
need to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-14 and Table 7-16 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/
standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

Table 7-14 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4

X1 W3 Color X1 W4 Color

Pin of Signal Twiste Pin of Signal Twiste


DB44 d Pair DB44 d Pair
Connec Cable Connec Cable
tor Identifi tor Identifi
er er

38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/R- T1 Blue

23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/R+ White

37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/R- T2 Orange

22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/R+ White

36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/R- T3 Green

21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/R+ White

35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/R- T4 Brown

20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/R+ White

34 Ring/T- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey

19 Tip/T+ White 26 Tip/T+ White

33 Ring/T- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue

18 Tip/T+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red

32 Ring/T- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange

17 Tip/T+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red

31 Ring/T- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green

16 Tip/T+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red

NOTE

In Table 7-14, R- and R+ stand for reception signals; T- and T+ stand for transmission signals.

Table 7-15 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-14.

Table 7-15 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable

Signal Bearer

Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals
to the BSC6900

Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals to the BSC6900

7-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Signal Bearer

Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals
from the BSC6900

Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals from the BSC6900

Table 7-16 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2


Twisted Pair Cable W2 Remarks Twisted Pair Cable W1 Remarks

Pin of X1 Pin of X2 Pin of X1 Pin of X2


Connector Connector Connector Connector

38 38 PAIR 15 15 PAIR

23 23 30 30

37 37 PAIR 14 14 PAIR

22 22 29 29

36 36 PAIR 13 13 PAIR

21 21 28 28

35 35 PAIR 12 12 PAIR

20 20 27 27

34 34 PAIR 11 11 PAIR

19 19 26 26

33 33 PAIR 10 10 PAIR

18 18 25 25

32 32 PAIR 9 9 PAIR

17 17 24 24

31 31 PAIR 8 8 PAIR

16 16 7 7

NOTE

In Table 7-16, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shielding layer
of the twisted pair cable.

Installation
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable are
connected to the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another
NE through transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair
cable can also be connected to another NE directly.

Figure 7-13 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

Figure 7-13 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables

7.8 BITS Clock Cable


The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock
cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals
to the GCUa/GCGa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the
BITS clock signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock
conversion cables.

Appearance
Figure 7-14 shows the 75-ohm coaxial clock cable.

Figure 7-14 75-ohm coaxial clock cable

(1) SMB connector (2) Label

Figure 7-15 shows the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

7-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-15 120-ohm clock conversion cable

(1) SMB connector 2Label

NOTE

The 120-ohm clock conversion cable has two SMB connectors at one end. Only one SMB connector is
used, and the other SMB connector is bound to the wire bushing by using cable ties. Pay attention to the
connection when using the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

Installation
One end of the BITS clock signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the
GCUa/GCGa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the BITS clock source.
Figure 7-16 shows the installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables.

Figure 7-16 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

7.9 Y-Shaped Clock Cable


The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cables. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped
clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHz
clock signals from the GCUa/GCGa board in the MPS to the SCUa board in the EPS.

NOTE

The Y-shaped clock cable is not required if the BSC6900 is configured with only one MPS and no EPS.

Appearance
Figure 7-17 shows the Y-shaped clock cable.

Figure 7-17 Y-shaped clock cable

(1) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables) (2) RJ45 connector

Installation
The RJ45 connector at one end of the Y-shaped clock cable is connected to the SCUa board in
the EPS. The two RJ45 connectors at the other end of the cable are connected to the active and
standby GCUa/GCGa boards in the MPS.
Figure 7-18 shows the installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables.

7-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-18 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables

7.10 Line Clock Signal Cable


The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to
transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the
GCUa/GCGa board.

NOTE

When the interface board providing line clock signals is located in the MPS, the line clock signals are sent
to the GCUa/GCGa board through the backplane of the subrack. In this case, the line clock signal cable is
not required.

Appearance
Figure 7-19 shows the line clock signal cable.

Figure 7-19 Line clock signal cable

(1) SMB connector

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

Installation
One end of the line clock signal cable is connected to the 2M0 or the 2M1 port on the interface
board. The other end of the signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the
GCUa/GCGa board.

7.11 Straight-Through Cable


The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded
straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards
in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/
FG2c board to other devices. The number of straight-through cables to be installed depends on
the site requirements.

Appearance
Figure 7-20 shows the shielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-20 Shielded straight-through cable

NOTE

X1 and X2 are shielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-21 shows the unshielded straight-through cable.

7-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-21 Unshielded straight-through cable

NOTE

X1 and X2 are unshielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the unshielded straight-through cable.

Pin Assignment
Table 7-17 describes the pins in the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-
through cable and the unshielded straight-through cable.

Table 7-17 Pins of the straight-through cable


X1 End Wire Color X2 End Wire Color

X1-1 White and orange X2-1 White and orange

X1-2 Orange X2-2 Orange

X1-3 White and green X2-3 White and green

X1-4 Blue X2-4 Blue

X1-5 White and blue X2-5 White and blue

X1-6 Green X2-6 Green

X1-7 White and brown X2-7 White and brown

X1-8 Brown X2-8 Brown

Installation
l When the unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards in different
subracks, the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the cable are connected to the SCUa boards
that are located in different subracks, as shown in Figure 7-22.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

Figure 7-22 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between the
SCUa boards in different subracks

l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the OMUa board to other
devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to ETH0 or ETH1 on the
OMUa board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the
Ethernet port on the other devices.
l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/FG2c board to other
devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on the
FG2a/FG2c board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the
Ethernet port on the other devices.

7.12 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan


Subrack
The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the
service subracks.

Appearance
Figure 7-23 shows the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Figure 7-23 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack

7-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack has a DB9 connector at one end
and a DB15 connector at the other end.
Table 7-18 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Table 7-18 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack
Start End Description Remarks

X1.1 X2.7 Tx+ Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.6 Tx-

X1.3 X2.3 Rx+ Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.2 Rx-

X1.5 X2.5 GND -

X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL is


connected to
X2.SHELL through
the shielding layer.

Table 7-19 describes the signals listed in Table 7-18.

Table 7-19 Signals


Signal Signal Description

Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+ Positive phase signal received

Rx- Negative phase signal received

Installation
The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack
is connected to the MONITOR 0 port on the independent fan subrack. The DB9 connector at
the other end of the cable is connected to the Monitor port on the bottom subrack.

NOTE

When a cabinet is configured with multiple subracks, you should configure the subracks from bottom to
top. Therefore, the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is always connected to the
bottom subrack in the cabinet.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

7.13 Alarm Box Signal Cable


The alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You
can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the
alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.

Appearance
The connectors of the alarm box signal cable are of two types: DB9 and DB25. The actual type
must be consistent with that in the Site Survey Report. The following takes an alarm box signal
cable with the DB9 connector as an example.

Figure 7-24 shows an alarm box signal cable.

Figure 7-24 Alarm box signal cable

Pin Assignment
Table 7-20 describes the pins of the alarm box signal cable.

Table 7-20 Pins of the alarm box signal cable

RJ45 DB9

3 5

5 2

6 3

Installation
The RJ45 connector at one end of the alarm box signal cable is connected to the input serial port
on the alarm box. The DB9/DB25 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the
serial port on the LMT.

Figure 7-25 shows the connection of the alarm box signal cable.

7-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-25 Connection of the alarm box signal cable

7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution


Box
The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from
the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.

Appearance
Figure 7-26 shows the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

Figure 7-26 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box has a DB9 connector at one end and
a DB15 connector at the other end.
Table 7-21 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

Table 7-21 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

Start End Description Remarks

X1.1 X2.3 Tx+ Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Tx-

X1.3 X2.7 Rx+ Twisted pair

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

Start End Description Remarks

X1.4 X2.6 Rx-

X1.5 X2.5 RTN -

X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL is


connected to
X2.SHELL through
the shielding layer.

Table 7-22 describes the signals listed in Table 7-21.

Table 7-22 Signals


Signal Signal Description

Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+ Positive phase signal received

Rx- Negative phase signal received

Installation
The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box is
connected to the corresponding port on the power distribution box. The DB9 connector at the
other end of the cable is connected to the MONITOR 1 port on the independent fan subrack.
Figure 7-27 shows the installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power
distribution box.

Figure 7-27 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

7-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7.15 OMU serial port cable


The OMU serial port cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.

Appearance
Figure 7-28 shows the OMU serial port cable.

Figure 7-28 OMU serial port cable

Pin Assignment
Both ends of the OMU serial port cable should use DB9 female connectors. Table 7-23 lists the
pins of the OMU serial port cable.

Table 7-23 Pins of the OMU serial port cable

DB9 DB9

2 3

3 2

5 5

Installation Position
One end of the OMU serial port cable is connected to the COM serial port on the OMU. The
other end of the OMU serial port cable is connected to the serial port on the local maintenance
terminal.

NOTE
The OMU serial port cable is used for commissioning purpose only. It is not involved in routine installation.

7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable


The GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals to
the GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
7 Cables Hardware Description

Appearance
Figure 7-29 shows the GPS signal transmission cable.

Figure 7-29 GPS signal transmission cable

X1: SMA male connector X2: N-type female connector X3: N-type male connector

Installation
Connect the N-type female connector of a 1-meter-long cable to the N-type male connector of
a 2.5-meter-long cable to join the two cables into a 3.5-meter-long GPS signal transmission
cable. The SMA male connector at one end of the GPS signal transmission cable is connected
to port ANT on the panel of the GCGa board. The N-type female connector at the other end of
the cable is connected to port Protect on the surge protector at the cabinet top.

7.17 EMU RS485 Communication Cable


The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and
the EMU.

Appearance
Figure 7-30 shows the RS485 communication cable.

Figure 7-30 RS485 communication cable

7-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Pin Assignment
Table 7-24 describes the pins of the RS485 communication cable.

Table 7-24 Pins of the RS485 communication cable


RJ45 DB9

4 2

1 3

5 6

2 7

Installation
The DB9 male connector at one end of the RS485 communication cable is connected to the DB9
female connector on the environment monitoring device. The RJ45 connector at the other end
of the cable is connected to the J2 port on a power distribution box.

NOTE

One environment monitoring device is delivered with one RS485 signal cable (10 m) and one RS232 signal
cable (2 m). Choose one signal cable based on the actual requirements. The RS485 signal cable is
recommended. Use the Ethernet cable as a substitute if the length of the delivered signal cable is not
sufficient.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8 LEDs on the Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

8.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8.4 LEDs on the DPUb Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.5 LEDs on the DPUe Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
8.11 LEDs on the OMUa Board

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
8 LEDs on the Boards Hardware Description

There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD.
8.12 LEDs on the PAMU Board
There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
8.13 LEDs on the PEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.14 LEDs on the POUa Board
There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.15 LEDs on the POUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8.16 LEDs on the SCUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.17 LEDs on the SPUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.18 LEDs on the SPUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.19 LEDs on the UOIa Board
There are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.20 LEDs on the UOIc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-1 describes the LEDs on the AEUa board.

Table 8-1 LEDs on the AEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

8.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-2 describes the LEDs on the AOUa board.

Table 8-2 LEDs on the AOUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
8 LEDs on the Boards Hardware Description

LED Color Status Description

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

8.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 8-3 describes the LEDs on the AOUc board.

Table 8-3 LEDs on the AOUc board


LED Colo Status Description
r

RUN Gree ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.


n
ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.
0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Gree ON The board is in active mode.


n
OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Gree ON The STM-1 port does not receive


n signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

8.4 LEDs on the DPUb Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUb board.

8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-4 LEDs on the DPUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

8.5 LEDs on the DPUe Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-5 describes the LEDs on the DPUe board.

Table 8-5 LEDs on the DPUe board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
8 LEDs on the Boards Hardware Description

8.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-6 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.

Table 8-6 LEDs on the FG2a board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-7 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

8-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-7 LEDs on the FG2c board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-8 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 8-8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
8 LEDs on the Boards Hardware Description

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

8.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.

Table 8-9 LEDs on the GOUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

8.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

8-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-10 LEDs on the GOUc board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (optical Green ON The link is well connected.


port LED)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (optical Green OFF There is no data


port LED) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.11 LEDs on the OMUa Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD.
Table 8-11 describes the LEDs on the OMUa board.

Table 8-11 LEDs on the OMUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
8 LEDs on the Boards Hardware Description

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HD Green OFF There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read or


written.

8.12 LEDs on the PAMU Board


There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

Table 8-12 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.

Table 8-12 LEDs on the PAMU board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The PAMU board is functional and
1s communicates with the SCUa board
properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF The PAMU board is faulty or it does not
for 0.25s communicate with the SCUa board
properly.

OFF The power supply to the PAMU board


is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

8-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8.13 LEDs on the PEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-13 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Table 8-13 LEDs on the PEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

8.14 LEDs on the POUa Board


There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-14 describes the LEDs on the POUa board.

Table 8-14 LEDs on the POUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
8 LEDs on the Boards Hardware Description

LED Color Status Description

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

8.15 LEDs on the POUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 8-15 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.

Table 8-15 LEDs on the POUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.


0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

8.16 LEDs on the SCUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-16 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.

8-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-16 LEDs on the SCUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.17 LEDs on the SPUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-17 describes the LEDs on the SPUa board.

Table 8-17 LEDs on the SPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
8 LEDs on the Boards Hardware Description

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data transmission over


Ethernet port) the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

8.18 LEDs on the SPUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-18 describes the LEDs on the SPUb board.

Table 8-18 LEDs on the SPUb board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

8-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data transmission over


Ethernet port) the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

8.19 LEDs on the UOIa Board


There are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-19 describes the LEDs on the UOIa board.

Table 8-19 LEDs on the UOIa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

8.20 LEDs on the UOIc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 8-20 describes the LEDs on the UOIc board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
8 LEDs on the Boards Hardware Description

Table 8-20 LEDs on the UOIc board


LED Colo Status Description
r

RUN Gree ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.


n
ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.
0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Gree ON The board is in active mode.


n
OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Gree ON The STM-1 port does not receive


n signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

8-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

9 DIP Switches on Components

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on the subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
9.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board
The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
9.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board
The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.
9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board
The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board
The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board
The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
9.7 Pins on the PFCB Board
The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,
these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these
pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.
9.8 DIP Switches on the POUa Board
The POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
9 DIP Switches on Components Hardware Description

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on the subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP Switch


The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the
DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.

Appearance
Figure 9-1 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.

Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP Switch


The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The
higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 9-1 describes the bits.

9-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Table 9-1 Description about the bits

Bit Description

1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the
least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit
is set to OFF, it indicates 1.

6 Odd parity check bit

7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

8 (the most significant Reserved


bit)

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting


As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd
number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.
2. Set bit 7 to ON.
3. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch. Note that the setting of bit 8
remains unchanged.
l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.
l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Assume that the subracks are numbered from 0 to 2 and that bit 8 is set to OFF. Table 9-2
describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.

Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch

Sub Bit Setting of the DIP


rack Switch
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

9.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board


The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
9 DIP Switches on Components Hardware Description

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 9-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board.

Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

9-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-2, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-
board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 9-2 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the AEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

Description of the DIP Switches


DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the AEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 9-3 describes S2, S4, S6,
S8, and S10.

Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

S2 1-8 TX ground switch ON Setting the working


of E1s/T1s/J1s 24 mode to E1 unbalanced
to 31 mode

OFF Setting the working


mode to other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch ON Setting the working


of E1s/T1s/J1s 16 mode to E1 unbalanced
to 23 mode

OFF Setting the working


mode to other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch ON Setting the working


of E1s/T1s/J1s 0 mode to E1 unbalanced
to 7 mode

OFF Setting the working


mode to other modes

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
9 DIP Switches on Components Hardware Description

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

S8 1-8 TX ground switch ON Setting the working


of E1s/T1s/J1s 8 mode to E1 unbalanced
to 15 mode

OFF Setting the working


mode to other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for (ON, ON) Setting the working
setting the mode to E1 unbalanced
working mode, mode
consisting of two
bits (OFF, ON) Setting the working
mode to E1 balanced
mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the working


mode to T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the working


mode to J1 mode

NOTE

All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are
set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.

9.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board


The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 9-3 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

9-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-3 Layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

CAUTION
All DIP switches of the AOUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is
faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP Switches


Table 9-4 describes the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

Table 9-4 Description of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

DIP Switch Bit Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Setting loading mode to JTAG


configuration

(OFF, OFF) Setting loading mode to CPU slave parallel


configuration

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
9 DIP Switches on Components Hardware Description

DIP Switch Bit Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

3 ON Setting working mode to T1 mode

OFF Setting working mode to E1 mode

4 ON Setting the mapped path to AU3

OFF Setting the mapped path to AU4

5 ON Setting the information structure to TU11

OFF Setting the information structure to TU12

6 ON SONET

OFF SDH

7 - Reserved

8 - Reserved

NOTE

All the bits of the two DIP switches are set to OFF by default.

9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board


The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
Figure 9-4 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.

Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.
To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table
9-5.

9-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Table 9-5 DIP switch on the PAMU board


Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 9-5.

9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board


The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
Figure 9-5 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
9 DIP Switches on Components Hardware Description

Figure 9-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

9-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-5, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-
board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 9-5 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 9-6 describes the DIP
switches on the PEUa board.

Table 9-6 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board

DIP Bit Description Setting of DIP Meaning


Switc Switch
h

S2 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
9 DIP Switches on Components Hardware Description

DIP Bit Description Setting of DIP Meaning


Switc Switch
h

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting the (ON, ON) Setting the
working mode, working mode to
consisting of two bits E1 unbalanced
mode

(OFF, ON) Setting the


working mode to
E1 balanced
mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the


working mode to
T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the


working mode to
J1 mode

NOTE

All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are
set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.

9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board


The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 9-6 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

9-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 9-7. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the
address of the PFCU board is 1.

Table 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Description
Switch

SW1 1 (the least significant OFF 1


bit)

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 9-7 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 9-8. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the
address of the PFCU board is 4.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
9 DIP Switches on Components Hardware Description

Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Description


Switch

SW1 1 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1

4 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

9.7 Pins on the PFCB Board


The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,
these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these
pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.

Pins on the PFCB Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 9-8 shows the pins on the PFCB board.

Figure 9-8 Pins on the PFCB board

To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described
in Table 9-9.

Table 9-9 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

Pin 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16


Numb
er

Connec No No No No Yes No No No
ted to
jumper

9-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Pins on the PFCB Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)


Figure 9-9 shows the pins on the PFCB board.

Figure 9-9 Pins on the PFCB board

To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described
in Table 9-10.

Table 9-10 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack)
Pin 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Numb
er

Connec No No No No No No Yes No
ted to
jumper

NOTE

The pins on the PFCB board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

9.8 DIP Switches on the POUa Board


The POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 9-10 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
9 DIP Switches on Components Hardware Description

Figure 9-10 Layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

9-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-01-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

CAUTION
All the DIP switches on the POUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel
is faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP Switches


Table 9-11 describes the DIP switches on the POUa board.

Table 9-11 Description of the DIP switches on the POUa board


DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Bit Meaning

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Setting loading mode


to JTAG configuration

(OFF, OFF) Setting loading mode


to CPU slave parallel
configuration

3 ON Setting working mode


to T1 mode

OFF Setting working mode


to E1 mode

4 ON Setting the mapped


path to AU3

OFF Setting the mapped


path to AU4

5 ON Setting the
information structure
to TU11

OFF Setting the


information structure
to TU12

6 ON SONET

OFF SDH

7 - Reserved

8 - Reserved

NOTE

All the bits of the two DIP switches are set to OFF by default.

Issue 08 (2011-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.